Microline Reference Manual SIDMref
User Manual: Microline Reference Manual La Biblioteca de los 8 bits
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 180
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
®
OKIDATA
Models
ML320 Epson/IBM
ML320 MICROLINE Standard
ML321 Epson/IBM
ML321 MICROLINE Standard
ML320 Turbo & ML321 Turbo
ML390 Turbo & ML391 Turbo
ML520 & ML521
ML590 & ML591
MICROLINE ® Reference Manual
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete,
accurate and up-to-date. Okidata assumes no responsibility for the results of errors beyond its
control. Okidata also cannot guarantee that changes in software and equipment made by other
manufacturers, and referred to in this handbook, will not affect the applicability of the
information in this manual. Mention of software products manufactured by other companies
does not necessarily constitute endorsement by Okidata.
© 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997 by OKIDATA.
Revised edition June 1997.
Written and produced by the OKIDATA Publications Department. Please address any
comments on this publication
•
by mail to:
Publications Services Department
OKIDATA
532 Fellowship Road
Mount Laurel, NJ 08054-3405
•
or by eMail to:
pubs@okidata.com
We welcome you to visit our web site:
http://www.okidata.com
OKIDATA and MICROLINE are registered trademarks of Oki Electric Industry Company, Ltd.;
marques déposées de Oki Electric Industry Company, Ltd. OKIDATA—Marca Registrada, Oki
Electric Industry Company, Ltd.
Epson is a registered trademark of Epson America, Inc.
IBM and PC are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and other countries.
Contents
How To Use This Manual .........................................................................................................vii
How the Manual is Organized.....................................................................................vii
Conventions Used in this Manual ...............................................................................viii
Abbreviations & Acronyms...........................................................................................ix
Command Summary .................................................................................................................xi
IBM Proprinter Commands ...........................................................................................xi
Epson FX Commands ................................................................................................. xix
Epson LQ Commands................................................................................................ xxv
Okidata MICROLINE Standard Commands .............................................................. xxxii
Chapter 1: Printer Drivers ......................................................................................................... 1
Usable Drivers ..............................................................................................................1
Okidata Software Drivers ..............................................................................................2
Software Driver Selection ..............................................................................................4
Embedded Commands ..................................................................................................4
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands ........................................................................................ 5
IBM Character Set Commands .......................................................................................5
Select IBM Set I Command (IBM) ...............................................................................5
Select IBM Set II Command (IBM) ..............................................................................5
Select All Character Set [IBM Set III] Command (Epson LQ) ........................................6
Print Data from IBM All Characters Set [IBM Set III] Command (IBM)..........................6
Print One Character from IBM All Characters Set [IBM Set III] Command (IBM)...........7
Epson Character Set Commands ....................................................................................7
Select Epson Set 1 [Slanted Characters] Command (Epson) .........................................7
Select Epson Set 2 [Graphics Characters] Command (Epson) .......................................7
MICROLINE Character Set Commands ..........................................................................8
Select MICROLINE Standard Character Set Command (ML) ........................................8
Select MICROLINE Block Graphics Symbol Set Command (ML)..................................8
Select MICROLINE Line Character Set Command (ML) ...............................................8
International Character Set Commands ..........................................................................9
Select International Character Set Command (IBM/ML) ...............................................9
Select International Character Set Command (Epson) ................................................10
Print from Code Page Command (IBM/ML) ..................................................................11
Assign Code Page Command (Epson)...........................................................................12
Upper Range Control Code Commands (Epson) ...........................................................13
Select Code Page Set Command (Epson) ......................................................................13
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands.................................................................... 15
Pitch Setting Commands..............................................................................................15
Pitch Setting Commands for Non-compressed Printing (IBM/E/ML)............................15
Pitch Setting Commands for Compressed Printing (IBM)............................................16
Pitch Setting Commands for Compressed Printing (Epson).........................................16
Pitch Setting Commands for Compressed Printing (ML) .............................................17
Select Character Pitch/Point Size Command (Epson) ....................................................17
Select Character Pitch/Point Size Command (IBM-Oki unique).....................................19
Superscript/Subscript Commands (IBM/E/ML)...............................................................20
Double Width Commands (IBM/E/ML).........................................................................21
Double Height Commands (E/ML) ...............................................................................21
Double Width & Height Printing Commands ...............................................................22
Double Width & Height Printing Command, 9-Pin Printers (IBM)..............................22
Double Width & Height Printing Command, 24-Pin Printers (IBM)............................23
Combined Print Features Command (ML) ....................................................................24
Character Spacing Commands.....................................................................................25
Contents
i
Proportional Spacing Commands (IBM/E/ML) ...........................................................25
Intercharacter Spacing Commands (IBM/E/ML) .........................................................26
Set Horizontal Motion Index [HMI] Command (Epson LQ)...........................................27
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands ................................................................................... 29
Print Mode & Fonts Commands ...................................................................................29
Individual Print Mode & Font Commands for 9-Pin Printers (IBM/E/ML) ....................29
Individual Print Mode & Font Commands for 24-Pin Printers (IBM/E) ........................30
Combined Select Font Command (IBM)....................................................................31
Select Font Command (IBM) ....................................................................................32
Combined Print Mode Command (Epson).................................................................34
Italics Print Commands (IBM/E/ML)..............................................................................35
Emphasized & Enhanced Print Commands (IBM/E/ML) .................................................36
Underline/Overscore/Strike-Through Commands .........................................................36
Underline Commands (IBM/E/ML) ............................................................................36
Overscore Commands (IBM) ....................................................................................37
Score Style Command (Epson)..................................................................................37
Outline/Shadow Commands (IBM/E) ........................................................................38
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands.............................................................................. 39
Custom Character Commands: 9-Pin Printers...............................................................39
Designing a Custom Character for 9-Pin Printers.......................................................39
IBM Custom Character Commands for 9-Pin Printers ................................................40
Copy ROM to RAM Command for 9-Pin Printers (IBM)..........................................40
Down Line Load Characters Command for 9-Pin Printers (IBM) .............................41
Epson Custom Character Commands for 9-Pin Printers .............................................43
Copy ROM to RAM Command for 9-Pin Printers (Epson).......................................43
Down Line Load Characters Command for 9-Pin Printers (Epson) ..........................43
Custom Character Set On/Off Commands for 9-Pin Printers (Epson).......................44
Okidata MICROLINE Standard Custom Character Commands for 9-Pin Printers ........45
Copy ROM to RAM Command for 9-Pin Printers (ML) ...........................................45
Down Line Load Characters Commands for 9-Pin Printers (ML) .............................45
Select DLL Font Commands for 9-Pin Printers (ML) ...............................................45
Custom Character Commands: 24-Pin Printers.............................................................46
Designing a Custom Character for 24-Pin Printers.....................................................46
IBM Custom Character Commands for 24-Pin Printers ..............................................47
Down Line Load Characters Command for 24-Pin Printers (IBM) ...........................47
Epson Custom Character Commands for 24-Pin Printers ...........................................49
Copy ROM to RAM Command for 24-Pin Printers (Epson) .....................................49
Down Line Load Characters Command for 24-Pin Printers (Epson) ........................50
Custom Character Set On/Off Commands for 24-Pin Printers (Epson).....................51
Load Custom Character Set into Upper ASCII Command for 24-Pin Printers (Epson) ..51
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers ................................................................. 53
Overview....................................................................................................................53
Programming Graphics in BASIC .................................................................................54
Graphics Density Selection Commands (IBM/E) ...........................................................54
Graphics Density Selection Commands (ML) ...............................................................55
Graphics Select/Print Command (Epson) ......................................................................55
Reassign Graphics Codes Command (Epson)................................................................57
Select Graphics Command (Epson) ..............................................................................57
Select Graphics Mode Command (ML) ........................................................................57
Graphics Print Mode Commands (ML) .........................................................................59
Special Purpose Line Feed Commands (ML).................................................................60
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers ............................................................... 61
Overview....................................................................................................................61
Programming Graphics in BASIC .................................................................................62
ii
Contents
Graphics Density Selection Commands (IBM/E) ...........................................................62
Graphics Select/Print Command (IBM AGM/E).............................................................63
Reassign Graphics Codes Command (IBM AGM/E) ......................................................64
Graphics Resolution Command (IBM)..........................................................................64
Select Graphics Aspect Ratio Command (IBM).............................................................65
Select Graphics Mode Command (Epson) ....................................................................65
Set/Reset Graphics Mode Command (Epson)................................................................66
Print Raster Graphics Command (Epson) ......................................................................66
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands ............................................................................. 69
Backspace & Carriage Return Commands (IBM/E/ML) ..................................................69
Margin Setting Commands ..........................................................................................69
Set Left & Right Margins Command (IBM).................................................................69
Left and Right Margin Commands (Epson) ................................................................70
Left and Right Margin Commands (ML) ....................................................................72
Horizontal Tab Commands .........................................................................................73
Execute Horizontal Tab Command (IBM/E/ML) .........................................................73
Set Horizontal Tab Command (IBM/E) ......................................................................73
Set Tabs by Character Space Command (ML)............................................................74
Set Tabs by Dot Columns Command (ML) ................................................................74
Clear Horizontal Tab Settings Commands (IBM/E).....................................................76
Clear Horizontal Tab Settings Commands (ML).........................................................76
Horizontal Print Position Commands ...........................................................................76
Indent from Left Margin Command (IBM/ML) ...........................................................76
Set Multiple Print Positions Command (IBM/E/ML)....................................................77
Set Relative Dot Position Command (IBM)................................................................79
Set Relative Dot Position Command (IBM)................................................................80
Set Relative Dot Position Command (Epson) .............................................................80
Set Absolute Dot Position Command (Epson)............................................................80
Move to the Right & Left Commands (ML) ................................................................81
Uni-Directional Printing Commands (IBM/E/ML) ..........................................................82
Incremental Printing Commands (IBM/E/ML)................................................................82
Justification Commands (Epson)...................................................................................83
Contents
iii
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands .................................................................................. 85
Set Page Length Commands ........................................................................................85
Set Page Length in Inches Command (IBM/E/ML) ......................................................85
Set Page Length in Lines Command (IBM/E/ML) ........................................................85
Set Page Length in Defined Unit Comand (Epson).....................................................86
Form Feed Command (IBM/E/ML) ................................................................................87
Line Feed Commands..................................................................................................87
Line Feed with Carriage Return Command (IBM/E/ML)..............................................87
Line Feed without Carriage Return Command (ML)...................................................87
Line Feed & Carriage Return Selection Command (ML).............................................87
Fine Line Feed Commands (IBM/E/ML) .....................................................................88
Perform Line Feed Command (IBM)..........................................................................89
Auto Line Feed On/Off Commands (IBM) .................................................................89
Reverse Line Feed Commands (IBM/E/ML)................................................................89
Line Spacing Commands (IBM/E/ML) ...........................................................................90
General Line Spacing Commands (IBM/E/ML)...........................................................90
Fine-Increment Line Spacing Commands for 9-Pin Printers (IBM/E/ML) .....................90
ESC A N Line Spacing Command for 24-Pin Printers (IBM/E).....................................91
ESC 3 n Line Spacing Command for 24-Pin Printers (IBM/E) ......................................92
n/360-Inch Line Spacing Commands for 24-Pin Printers (IBM/E)................................92
Set Vertical Units (IBM)............................................................................................93
Vertical Tab Commands ..............................................................................................93
Execute Vertical Tab Command (IBM/E/ML) .............................................................94
Set Vertical Tabs Command (IBM/E) .........................................................................94
Clear Vertical Tabs Command (IBM/E)......................................................................94
Vertical Format Unit [VFU] Commands (Epson) ........................................................95
Vertical Format Unit [VFU] Commands (ML) ............................................................96
Vertical Position Commands .......................................................................................96
Skip Down Command (ML)......................................................................................96
Set Relative Vertical Position Command (Epson) .......................................................97
Set Absolute Vertical Position Command (Epson)......................................................97
Top of Form Commands (IBM/ML) ...........................................................................98
Set Page Format Command (Epson) ..........................................................................98
Skip Over Perforation Commands................................................................................99
Skip Over Perforation On/Off Commands (IBM/E).....................................................99
Skip Over Perforation ON/Off Commands (ML) ......................................................100
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers............................................................. 101
Bar Code Commands ................................................................................................101
Code 39 Bar Code Commands ..................................................................................101
Select Code 39 Bar Code Command ......................................................................102
Print Code 39 Bar Code Command ........................................................................104
Code 128 Bar Code Commands ................................................................................104
Select Code 128 Bar Code Command ....................................................................104
Print Code 128 Bar Codes Command .....................................................................105
Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Commands.....................................................................106
Select Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Command.........................................................106
Print Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Command...........................................................107
iv
Contents
UPC A Bar Code Commands .....................................................................................107
Select UPC A Bar Code Command .........................................................................107
Print UPC A Bar Code Command...........................................................................108
UPC E Bar Code Commands .....................................................................................109
Select UPC E Bar Code Command .........................................................................109
Print UPC E Bar Code Command ...........................................................................110
EAN 8 Bar Code Commands .....................................................................................110
Select EAN 8 Bar Code Command .........................................................................110
Print EAN 8 Bar Code Command ...........................................................................111
EAN 13 Bar Code Commands....................................................................................111
Select EAN 13 Bar Code Command........................................................................111
Print EAN 13 Bar Code Command .........................................................................112
Bar Code Command..................................................................................................112
Select/Print Postnet Bar Code Data Command ...........................................................112
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers........................................................... 113
Bar Code Commands ................................................................................................113
Code 39 Bar Code Commands ..................................................................................113
Select Code 39 Bar Code Command ......................................................................113
Print Code 39 Bar Code Command ........................................................................115
Code 128 Bar Code Commands ................................................................................116
Select Code 128 Bar Code Command ....................................................................116
Print Code 128 Bar Code Command ......................................................................117
Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Commands.....................................................................117
Select Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Command.........................................................118
Print Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Command...........................................................119
UPC A Bar Code Commands .....................................................................................119
Select UPC A Bar Code Command .........................................................................119
Print UPC A Bar Code Command...........................................................................120
UPC E Bar Code Commands .....................................................................................120
Select UPC E Bar Code Command .........................................................................120
Print UPC E Bar Code Command ...........................................................................121
EAN 8 Bar Code Commands .....................................................................................121
Select EAN 8 Bar Code Command .........................................................................121
Print EAN 8 Bar Code Command ...........................................................................122
EAN 13 Bar Code Commands....................................................................................122
Select EAN 13 Bar Code Command........................................................................123
Print EAN 13 Bar Code Command .........................................................................123
Postnet Bar Code Command......................................................................................124
Select/Print Postnet Bar Code Data Command ...........................................................124
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands ................................................................................. 125
Cancel Command (IBM/E/ML) ...................................................................................125
Change Emulation Command (IBM/E/ML) ..................................................................125
Cut Sheet Feeder (CSF) Commands ............................................................................126
CSF Commands (IBM/E) .........................................................................................126
Bin Select Command for Dual Bin CSF (IBM/E) .......................................................126
CSF Commands (ML) .............................................................................................126
Delete Command (Epson)..........................................................................................127
Contents
v
Half-Speed Printing Commands (E/ML) ......................................................................127
Initialize Printer Commands (E/ML)............................................................................127
Most Significant Bit Commands (Epson) .....................................................................128
Paper-Out Sensor Commands (IBM/E/ML) ..................................................................128
Print Suppress Mode Commands ...............................................................................129
Print Suppress Mode On/Off Commands (IBM) .......................................................129
Print Suppress Mode On/Off Commands (E/ML) .....................................................129
Select Color Command (IBM/E) .................................................................................130
Set Unit Command (Epson)........................................................................................130
Software I-Prime Command (IBM/E/ML).....................................................................131
Stop Printing Command (IBM) ...................................................................................131
Appendix A: Interfacing......................................................................................................... 133
Parallel Interface .......................................................................................................133
Serial Interface ..........................................................................................................134
Commonly Used Serial Cable Configurations.............................................................135
Appendix B: Listing of Tables ................................................................................................ 137
Index...................................................................................................................................... 141
vi
Contents
How To Use this Manual
This Programmer’s Guide/Reference Manual is a supplement to the manuals for the various
model printers. It contains additional information on selecting printer drivers and on the printer
commands, as well as interfacing specifications.
How the Manual is Organized
Command Summary
Tabular listings of the commands for each emulation, with references to the page in the manual
on which the description for the command appears.
Chapter 1: Printer Drivers
Selecting printer drivers.
Chapters 2 through 12 — Commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands
Appendix A: Interfacing
Pin-out diagrams for the parallel and serial interfaces. It also includes wiring diagrams for
commonly used serial cable configurations.
Appendix B: Listing of Tables
Includes a complete listing of the tables in this manual.
How to Use this Manual
vii
Conventions Used in this Manual
The following conventions are used in the command chapters of this manual:
•
The emulation(s) to which each command applies is given in parentheses at the end of the
heading for the command. The emulations (IBM = IBM Proprinter, E = Epson FX, and ML =
OKIDATA MICROLINE Standard) are described in Chapter 1.
For example:
Proportional Spacing Commands (IBM/E/ML)
•
The printer models to which each command applies are given immediately below the
command heading, preceded by a check mark (⻬).
ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I = Models ML320 & ML321, Epson/IBM-Compatible
ML320 Std., ML321 Std. = Models ML320 & ML321, MICROLINE Standard Emulation
ML320T, ML321T = Models ML320 Turbo & ML321 Turbo
ML390T, ML391T = Models ML320 Turbo & ML321 Turbo
ML520, ML521 = Models ML520 & ML521
ML590, ML591 = Models ML590 and ML591
For example:
Proportional Spacing Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320T, ML321T
⻬ ML390T, ML391T
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
• Text denoting lines of BASIC programming is set in the Courier font.
For example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[@";CHR$(4);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);
CHR$(34);CHR$(0)
• Notes, which contain important information that you should read, are set in italics.
For example:
Note: If you send a location value outside the set left or right margin, this command
will be ignored.
viii
How to Use this Manual
Abbreviations & Acronyms
The following abbreviations and acronyms are used in this manual:
ASCII
American Standard Codes for Information Interchange
Cpi
Characters per inch
Cpl
Characters per line
CSF
Cut Sheet Feeder
Dec
Decimal
DLL
Down Line Loading
Dpi
Dots per inch
E
E/I
Epson FX Emulation
Epson/IBM Compatible Model
Hex
Hexadecimal
HSD
High Speed Draft
IBM
IBM Proprinter Emulation
ML
OKIDATA MICROLINE Standard Emulation
NLQ
Near Letter Quality
ROM
Read Only Memory
RAM
Random Access Memory
Std.
OKIDATA MICROLINE Standard Model
TOF
Top of Form
UTL
Utility
How to Use this Manual
ix
Command Summary
This summary is in four sections:
•
•
•
•
IBM Commands
Epson FX Commands
Epson LQ Commands
Okidata MICROLINE Standard Commands
Each is section arranged numerically by the decimal value for the ASCII command. The page
number given in the last column refers you to the explanation of the command in this manual.
The printer models which include that particular command are listed in the third column:
䊳 Models ML320 and ML321 incorporate either the Epson FX and IBM Proprinter
emulations (designated as “E/I” in the table) or the OKIDATA MICROLINE Standard
emulation (designated as “Std.” in the table).
Note: If you’re not sure which version of the ML320 or ML321 printer you have, run the
Self Test (hold LF button while turning on the printer), then look at the first line
that prints: if you see EI, you have the Epson/IBM version; if you see OKI, you
have the OKIDATA MICROLINE Standard version.
Models ML 320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo, ML520 and ML521 incorporate the IBM Proprinter,
Epson FX and OKIDATA MICROLINE Standard emulations.
Models ML 390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo, ML590 and ML591 incorporate the IBM Proprinter, IBM
Proprinter AGM, and Epson LQ emulations.
䊳
IBM Proprinter Commands
IBM Command: ASCII
Decimal
BS
8
Function
Backspace
HT
9
Execute horizontal tab
LF
10
Line feed (with carriage
return)
VT
11
Vertical tab
FF
12
Form feed
CR
13
Carriage return
SO
14
Begin double width
printing line by line
IBM Command Summary
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
Page
69
73
87
94
87
69
21
xi
IBM Command: ASCII
Decimal
SI
15
DC1
17
Print suppress mode off
DC2
18
Select 10 cpi
DC4
20
End double width printing
line by line
CAN
24
Cancel
ESC SI
27 15
ESC DLE @ Pn A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
27 16 64 Pn A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
ESC DLE A m n1 ... n8
27 16 65 m n1 ... n8
ESC DLE A m n1 ... n8
27 16 65 m n1 ... n8
ESC DLE B m n [data]
27 16 66 m n [data]
ESC DLE B m n [data]
27 16 66 m n [data]
ESC DLE C P1 [data]
27 16 67 P1 [data]
ESC DLE C P1 [data]
27 16 67 P1 [data]
ESC DLE F Pno Pn Lp Hp
27 16 70 Pno Pn Lp Hp
ESC EM 1
27 25 49
ESC EM 2
27 25 50
ESC EM I
27 25 73
ESC EM R
27 25 82
ESC SP n
27 32 n
xii
Function
Select compressed pitch
Select 20 cpi
Set multiple print positions
Select bar code type and
size
Select bar code type and
size
Print bar code data
Print bar code data
Print Postnet bar code
data
Print Postnet bar code
data
Select character
pitch/point size
Select Bin 1 of Dual-Bin
CSF
Select Bin 2 of Dual-Bin
CSF
Insert Sheet
(Cut Sheet Feeder)
Eject sheet
(Cut Sheet Feeder)
Set intercharacter spacing
IBM Command Summary
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T, ML590/591
Page
16
129
15
21
125
16
77
101112
113122
101112
113122
101,
112
113,
124
19
126
ML390T/391T, ML590/591
126
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321,
ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
126
126
26
IBM Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC ! n
27 33 n
ESC # 0
27 35 48
Function
Select international
character set
Select HSD print mode
ESC $
27 36
Copy ROM character set
to RAM character set
ESC % 4 n
27 37 52 n
ESC % 5 n
27 37 53 n
Perform n/360" line feed
ESC % 8 n
27 37 56 n
ESC % 9 n
27 37 57 n
Set line spacing to n/360"
ESC % B n1 n2 n3 n4
27 37 66 n1 n2 n3 n4
Perform n/144" line feed
Set line spacing to n/144"
Indent from left margin
ESC % G
27 37 71
Italic printing on
ESC % H
27 37 72
Italic printing off
ESC * m n1 n2 [data]
27 42 n1 n2[data]
ESC - 0
27 45 48
Graphics select/print:
AGM only
Underline printing off
ESC - 1
27 45 49
Underline printing on
ESC 0
27 48
Set line spacing to 1/8"
ESC 1
27 49
Set line spacing to 7/72"
ESC 2
27 50
Set line feed stored by ESC
An
IBM Command Summary
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML390T/ML391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML390T/ML391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML390T/ML391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
xiii
Page
9
29
40
88
88
92
90
76
35
35
63
36
36
90
90
89
IBM Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC 3 n
27 51 n
ESC 3 n
27 51 n
ESC 4
27 52
Set line spacing to n/216”
in PPR, or to n/180" in
AGM
Set top of form
ESC 5 0
27 53 48
Auto line feed off
ESC 5 1
27 53 49
Auto line feed on
ESC 6
27 54
Select IBM Set II
ESC 7
27 55
Select IBM Set I
ESC 8
27 56
Paper-out sensor off
ESC 9
27 57
Paper-out sensor on
ESC :
27 58
Select 12 cpi
ESC = n1 n2 # a1 a2 a3 m ad1 ad2 id1
id2 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 [data]
26 61 n1 n2 35 a1 a2 a3 m ad1 ad2 id1
id2 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 [data]
ESC = c1 c2 m n a1 a2 [data]
27 61 c1 c2 m n a1 a2 [data]
xiv
Function
Set line spacing to n/216”
Down line load custome
characters
Down line load characters
ESC ? m n
27 63 m n
ESC A n
27 65 n
Reassign graphics codes:
Applies to IBM AGM only
Set line spacing of n/72"
ESC A n
27 65 n
ESC B NUL
27 66 0
Set line spacing of n/72" in
PPR, or to n/60" in AGM
Clear vertical tabs
IBM Command Summary
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390T/ML391T
Page
90
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML590/591
98
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390/391T,
ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390T/ML391T
41
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
92
89
89
5
5
128
128
15
47
64
90
91
94
IBM Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
27 66 n1 n2 ... nk 0
ESC C n
27 67 n
ESC C NUL n
27 67 0 n
ESC D NUL NUL
27 68 0 0
ESC D n1 n2 ... nk NUL
27 68 n1 n2 ... nk 0
Function
Set vertical tabs
Set page length in lines.
Set page length in inches.
Clear horizontal tab
settings
Set horizontal tab
ESC E
27 69
Emphasized printing on
ESC F
27 70
Emphasized printing off
ESC G
27 71
Enhanced printing on
ESC H
27 72
Enhanced printing off
ESC I n
27 73 n
Combined select font
ESC J n
27 74 n
Perform n/216" line feed
ESC J n
27 74 n
ESC K Ln Hn [data]
27 75 Ln Hn [data]
Perform n/216" (PPR) or
n/180" (AGM) line feed
Begin single density
graphics
ESC L Ln Hn [data]
27 76 Ln Hn [data]
Double density graphics
ESC N n
27 78 n
Skip over perforation on
ESC O
27 79
Skip over perforation off
IBM Command Summary
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T.
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390T/391T
Page
94
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
54
85
85
76
73
36
36
36
36
31
88
88
54
99
99
xv
IBM Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC P 0
27 80 48
ESC P 1
27 80 49
Proportional spacing on
ESC Q ETX
27 81 3
Print suppress mode on
ESC Q SYN
27 81 16
Print suppress mode on
ESC Q #
27 81 23
ESC Q $
27 81 24
ESC R
27 82
Print suppress mode on
ESC S 0
27 83 48
Start superscript printing
ESC S 1
27 83 48
Start subscript printing
ESC T
27 84
xvi
Function
Proportional spacing off
Print suppress mode on
Clear vertical tabs (resets
to default horizontal tabs)
Stop superscript/subscript
printing
ESC U 0
27 85 48
Uni-directional printing
off
ESC U 1
27 85 49
Uni-directional printing
on
ESC V n
27 86 n
Set intercharacter spacing
ESC W 0
27 87 48
End double width printing
ESC W 1
27 87 49
Begin double width
printing
ESC X n m
27 88 n m
Set left & right margins
ESC Y Ln Hn [data]
27 89 Ln Hn [data]
Double speed/ double
density graphics
IBM Command Summary
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320 E/I,
ML320T,
ML520
ML321 E/I,
ML321T,
ML521
ML391T,
ML591
ML390T,
ML590
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
Page
25
25
129
129
129
129
94
20
20
20
82
82
26
21
21
69
54
IBM Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC Z Ln Hn [data]
27 90 Ln Hn [data]
ESC [ @ Ln Hn NUL NUL n1 n2
27 91 64 Ln Hn 0 0 n1 n2
ESC [ @ n1 n2 m1 m2 m3 m4
27 91 64 n1 n2 m1 m2 m3 m4
ESC [ T Ln Hn NUL NUL Hcp Lcp NUL
27 91 84 Ln Hn 0 0 Hcp Lcp 0
ESC [ \ 4 0 0 0 n1 n2
27 91 92 52 48 48 48 n1 n2
ESC [ g n1 n2 m [data]
27 91 103 n1 n2 m [data]
ESC [ I Ln Hn Hfid Lfid Hfwd Lfwd fa
27 91 108 Ln Hn Hfid Lfid Hfwd Lfwd fa
ESC \ Ln Hn
27 92 Ln Hn
ESC ]
27 93
ESC ^ n
27 94 n
Function
Quadruple density
graphics
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390T/391T
Page
54
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390T/391T
11
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T
64
6
Incremental printing off
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521,
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
ML390T/391T, ML320T/321T
Incremental printing on
ML390T/391T, ML320T/321T
82
Stop printing (deselect)
ML390T/391T, ML590/591
131
Specify typeface
ML390T/391T, ML590/591
30
Set relative dot position
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
79
Set character width, line
spacing and character
height .
Begin/end double height
printing.
Print from code page
Set vertical units for the
line spacing command.
Set graphics resolution
Select font
Print data from the All
Characters Set
Reverse line feed
Print one character from
the All Characters Set
ESC _ 0
27 95 48
End overscore printing
ESC _ 1
27 95 49
Begin overscore printing
ESC d n1 n2
27 100 n1 n2
ESC e n1 n2
27 101 n1 n2
ESC g
27 103
ESC i 0
27 105 48
ESC i 1
27 105 49
ESC j
27 106
ESC k n
27 107
ESC | Ln Hn
27 108 Ln Hn
Set right relative position
Set left relative position
Select 15 cpi
IBM Command Summary
22
23
93
32
xvii
89
7
37
37
80
80
15
82
IBM Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC n Pn
27 110 Pn
ESC q n
27 113 n
ESC r n
27 114 n
ESC x 0
27 120 48
ESC x 1
27 120 49
ESC { n
27 123 n
ESC } NUL
27 125 0
xviii
Function
Select Graphics Aspect
Ratio: PPR only
Specify outline/shadow
Applies to Model(s)
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T, ML590/591
38
Select color
ML590/591
130
Select Utility print mode
ML390/391T
30
Select LQ print mode
ML390/391T
30
Change emulation
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321T,ML390/391T,
ML520/521, ML590/591
125
Software I-Prime
IBM Command Summary
Page
65
131
Epson FX Commands
Epson FX Command: ASCII
Decimal
BS
8
HT
9
LF
10
VT
11
FF
12
CR
13
Set multiple print positions
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Select bar code type and size
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Print bar code data
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Print Postnet bar code data
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Execute horizontal tab
Line feed (with carriage return)
Vertical tab
Form feed
Carriage return
SO
14
SI
15
DC1
17
Begin double width printing
line by line
Select compressed pitch
DC2
18
Cancel 20 cpi
DC3
19
Print suppress mode on
DC4
20
End double width printing line
by line
CAN
24
Cancel
ESC SO
27 14
ESC SI
27 15
ESC DLE @ Pn A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
27 16 64 Pn A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
ESC DLE A m n1 ... n8
27 16 65 m n1 ... n8
ESC DLE B m n [data]
27 16 66 m n [data]
ESC DLE C P1 [data]
27 16 67 P1 [data]
xx
Function
Backspace
Print suppress mode off
Begin double width printing
line by line
Select 20 cpi
Epson FX Command Summary
Page
69
73
87
94
87
69
21
16
129
16
129
21
125
21
16
77
101112
101112
113,
124
Epson FX Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC EM I
27 25 73
ESC EM R
27 25 82
ESC SP n
27 32 n
ESC ! n
27 33 n
ESC #
27 35
ESC $ Ln Hn
27 36
Function
Insert sheet (Cut Sheet Feeder)
Eject sheet (Cut Sheet Feeder)
Set intercharacter spacing
Combined print mode
Cancel MSB control
Set absolute dot position
ESC % 0
27 37 48
Select standard character set
ESC % 1
27 37 49
Select custom character set
ESC % 5 n
27 37 53
Perform n/144" line feed
ESC % 9 n
27 37 57 n
Set line spacing to n/144"
ESC & NUL n1 n2 a [data]
27 38 0 n1 n2 a [data]
ESC ( 0
27 40 48
ESC ( t 3 0 Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
27 40 116 51 48 Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
ESC * m Ln Hn [data]
27 42 m Ln Hn [data]
ESC - 0
27 45 48
ESC - 1
27 45 49
ESC / n
27 47 n
ESC 0
27 48
Down line load characters
Select HSD print mode
Assign code page
Graphics select/print
Underline printing off
Underline printing on
Select vertical tab channel
Set line spacing to 1/8"
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321T
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
Epson FX Command Summary
Page
126
126
26
34
128
80
44
44
88
90
43
29
12
55
36
36
95
90
xxi
Epson FX Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC 1
27 49
ESC 2
27 50
ESC 3 n
27 51 n
Set line spacing to 1/6"
Set line spacing to n/216"
ESC 4
27 52
Italic printing on
ESC 5
27 53
Italic printing off
ESC 6
27 54
Permit printing upper range
control codes
ESC 7
27 55
Cancel printing upper range
control codes
ESC 8
27 56
Paper-out sensor off
ESC 9
27 57
Paper-out sensor on
ESC : NUL NUL NUL
27 58 0 0 0
ESC : NUL n NUL
27 58 0 n 0
ESC <
27 60
Copy ROM character set to
RAM character set
Copy ROM character set to
RAM character set
Print uni-directional for one
line only
ESC =
27 61
Set Most Significant Bit (MSB)
to zero
ESC >
27 62
Set MSB to 1
ESC ? m n
27 63 m n
ESC @
27 64
ESC A n
27 65 n
xxii
Function
Set line spacing to 7/72"
Reassign graphics
Initialize printer
Set line spacing to n/72"
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I, ML320T/321T
Page
90
ML520/521
43
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
82
Epson FX Command Summary
90
90
35
35
13
13
128
128
43
128
128
57
127
90
Epson FX Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC B NUL
27 66 0
ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
27 66 n1 n2 ... nk 0
ESC C n
27 67 n
ESC C NUL n
27 67 0 n
ESC D NUL NUL
27 68 0 0
ESC D n1 n2 ... nk NUL
27 68 n1 n2 ... nk 0
ESC E
27 69
ESC F
27 70
ESC G
27 71
ESC H
27 72
ESC I 0
27 73 48
ESC I 1
27 73 49
ESC K Ln Hn [data]
27 75 Ln Hn [data]
ESC L Ln Hn [data]
27 76 Ln Hn [data]
ESC M
27 77
ESC N n
27 78 n
ESC O
27 79
ESC P
27 80
ESC Q n
27 81 n
ESC R n
27 82 n
ESC S 0
27 83 48
ESC S 1
27 83 49
ESC T
27 84
Function
Clear vertical tabs
Set vertical tabs
Set page length in lines.
Set page length in inches.
Clear horizontal tab settings
Set horizontal tab
Emphasized printing on
Emphasized printing off
Enhanced printing on
Enhanced printing off
Cancel printing upper range
control codes
Permit printing upper range
control codes
Begin single density graphics
Double density graphics
Select 12 cpi
Skip over perforation on
Skip over perforation off
Select 10 cpi
Set right margin
Select international character
set
Start superscript printing
Start subscript printing
Stop superscript/ subscript
printing
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Epson FX Command Summary
Page
94
94
85
85
76
73
36
36
36
36
13
13
54
54
15
99
99
15
70
10
20
20
20
xxiii
Epson FX Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC U 0
27 85 48
ESC U 1
27 85 49
ESC W 0
27 88 48
ESC W 1
27 88 49
ESC Y Ln Hn [data]
27 89 Ln Hn [data]
ESC Z Ln Hn [data]
27 90 Ln Hn [data]
ESC \ Ln Hn
27 92 Ln Hn
ESC ^ m Ln Hn [data]
27 94 m Ln Hn [data]
ESC a 0
27 97 48
ESC a 1
27 97 49
ESC a 2
27 97 50
ESC a 3
27 97 51
ESC b m n1 n2 ... nk NUL
27 98 m n1 n2 ... n 0
ESC g
27 103
ESC i 0
27 105 48
ESC i 1
27 105 49
ESC k n
27 107 n
ESC l n
27 108 n
ESC p 0
27 112 48
ESC p 1
27 112 49
ESC s 0
27 115 48
ESC s 1
27 115 49
xxiv
Function
Uni-directional printing off
Select 15 cpi
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML520/521
15
Incremental printing off
ML320T/321T
82
Incrementatl printing on
ML320T/321T
82
Select NLQ print mode
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
29
Uni-directional printing on
End double width printing
Begin double width printing
Double speed/double density
graphics
Quadruple density graphics
Set relative dot position
Select 9-pin graphics printing
Left justification
Center justification
Right justification
Full (left and right) justification
Set vertical format unit (VFU)
Set left margin
Proportional spacing off
Proportional spacing on
Half-speed printing off
Half-speed printing on
Epson FX Command Summary
Page
82
82
21
21
54
54
80
57
83
83
83
83
95
70
25
25
127
127
Epson FX Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC t 0
27 116 48
ESC t 1
27 116 49
ESC w 0
27 119 48
Function
Select Epson Set 1
Select Epson Set 2
End double height printing
ESC w 1
27 119 49
Begin double height printing
ESC x 0
27 120 48
ESC x 1
27 120 49
ESC { n
27 123 n
Select Utility print mode
ESC } NUL
27 125 0
DEL
127
Select NLQ print mode
Change emulation
Software I-Prime
Delete one character
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML390T/391T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
ML520/521
ML320/321 E/I,
ML320T/321T,
ML520/521
Epson FX Command Summary
Page
7
7
21
21
29
29
125
131
127
xxv
Epson LQ Commands
Epson LQ Command: ASCII
Decimal
BS
8
HT
9
LF
10
VT
11
FF
12
CR
13
SO
14
SI
15
DC1
17
DC2
18
DC3
19
DC4
20
CAN
24
ESC SO
27 14
ESC SI
27 15
ESC DLE @ Pn A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
27 16 64 Pn A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
ESC DLE A m n1 ... n8
27 16 65 m n1 ... n8
ESC DLE B m n [data]
27 16 66 m n [data]
ESC DLE C P1 [data]
27 16 67 P1 [data]
ESC DLE G n 1
27 16 71 n 49
ESC EM 1
27 25 49
ESC EM 2
27 25 50
Function
Backspace
Applies to Model(s)
ML390T/ML391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML590/591
Page
69
69
Set/reset raster graphics
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390/391T
113122
113122
113,
124
66
Select Bin 1 of Dual-Bin CSF
ML590/591
126
Select Bin 2 of Dual-Bin CSF
ML590/591
126
Execute horizontal tab
Line feed (with carriage return)
Vertical tab
Form feed
Carriage return
Begin double width printing line by line
Select compressed pitch
Print suppress mode off
Cancel 20 cpi
Print suppress mode on
End double width printing line by line
Cancel
Begin double width printing line by line
Select 20 cpi
Set multiple print positions
Select bar code type and size
Print bar code data
Print Postnet bar code data
Epson LQ Command Summary
73
87
94
87
21
16
129
16
129
21
125
21
16
77
xxvii
Epson LQ Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC EM I
27 25 73
ESC EM R
27 25 82
ESC US 0
27 31 48
ESC US 1
27 31 49
ESC SP n
27 32 n
ESC ! n
27 33 n
ESC #
27 35
ESC $ Ln Hn
27 36 Ln Hn
ESC % 0
27 37 48
ESC % 1
27 37 49
ESC % 5 n
27 37 53 n
ESC & m n1 n2 d0 d1 d2 [data]
27 38 m n1 n2 d0 d1 d2 [data]
ESC & NUL m n1 n2 d0 d1 d2 [data]
27 38 0 m n1 n2 d0 d1 d2 [data]
ESC ( - Ln Hn Pn D1 D2
27 40 45 Ln Hn Pn D1 D2
ESC ( C 2 0 Lp Hp
27 40 67 40 48 Lp Hp
ESC ( G Ln Hn Pn
27 40 71 Ln Hn Pn
ESC ( U Ln Hn Pn
27 40 85 Ln Hn Pn
ESC ( V Ln Hn Lp Hp
27 40 86 Ln Hn Lp Hp
ESC ( ^ Ln Hn [data]
27 40 94 Ln Hn [data]
ESC ( c 2 0 Lt Ht Lb Hb
27 40 99 50 48 Hn Lt Ht Lb Hb
ESC ( t Ln Hn Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
27 40 116 Ln Hn Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
ESC ( v Ln Hn Lp Hp
27 40 118 Ln Hn Lp Hp
ESC * m n1 n2 [data]
27 42 n1 n2 [data]
xxviii
Function
Insert sheet (Cut Sheet Feeder)
Applies to Model(s)
ML390T/391T
Page
126
Eject sheet (Cut Sheet Feeder)
ML390T/391T
126
End double height printing
21
Perform n/144" line feed
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T ,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T ,
ML590/591
ML590/591
Down line load characters
ML390T/391T
50
Down line load characters
ML590/591
50
Select score style: underline, overscore, or
strike through
Set Page Length
ML390T/391T
37
ML390T/391T
86
Select graphics mode
65
Set increment of movement
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T
Absolute position line feed
ML390T/391T
98
Select All Character Set
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T
6
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T
13
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
63
Begin double height printing
Set character spacing.
Combined print mode
Cancel MSB control
Set absolute dot position
Select standard character set
Select custom character set
Set Page Format
Select character table
Relative position line feed
Graphics select/print
Epson LQ Command Summary
21
26
34
128
80
51
51
88
130
98
97
Epson LQ Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC + n
27 43 n
ESC - 0
27 45 48
ESC - 1
27 45 49
ESC . Pc Pv Ph Pm Ln Hn [data]
27 46 Pc Pv Ph Pm Ln Hn [data]
ESC / n
27 47 n
ESC 0
27 48
ESC 2
27 50
ESC 3 n
27 51 n
ESC 3 n
27 51 n
ESC 4
27 52
ESC 5
27 53
ESC 6
27 54
ESC 7
27 55
ESC 8
27 56
ESC 9
27 57
ESC : NUL n NUL
27 58 0 n 0
ESC <
27 60
ESC =
27 61
ESC >
27 62
ESC ? m n
27 63 m n
ESC @
27 64
ESC A n
27 65 n
ESC B NUL
27 66 0
Function
Set line spacing to n/360"
Underline printing off
Underline printing on
Print Raster Graphics
Select vertical tab channel.
Set line spacing to 1/8"
Set line spacing to 1/6"
Applies to Model(s)
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T.
ml590/591
ML390T/ML391T
Page
92
36
36
66
95
90
90
Set line spacing to n/180"
ML390T/ML391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/ML391T
Set line spacing to n/216"
ML590/591
92
Italic printing on
ML390T/391T
35
Italic printing off
ML390T/391T
35
Permit printing upper range control codes
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T ,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T, ML391T,
ML590/591
ML390T, ML391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T, ML391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/ML391T,
ML590/591
ML590/591
13
Cancel printing upper range control codes
Paper-out sensor off
Paper-out sensor on
Copy ROM character set to RAM
character set
Print uni-directional for one line only
Set Most Significant Bit (MSB) to zero
Set MSB to 1
Reassign graphics
Initialize printer
Set line spacing to n/60"
Clear vertical tabs
Epson LQ Command Summary
92
13
128
128
49
82
128
128
64
127
91
94
xxix
Epson LQ Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
27 66 n1 n2 ... nk 0
ESC C n
26 67 n
ESC C NUL n
27 67 0 n
ESC D NUL NUL
27 68 0 0
ESC D n1 n2 ... nk NUL
27 68 n1 n2 ... nk 0
ESC E
27 69
ESC F
27 70
ESC G
27 71
ESC H
27 72
ESC J n
27 74 n
ESC K Ln Hn [data]
27 75 Ln Hn [data]
ESC L Ln Hn [data]
27 76 Ln Hn [data]
ESC M
27 77
ESC N n
27 78 n
ESC O
27 79
ESC P
27 80
ESC Q n
27 81 n
ESC R n
27 82 n
ESC S 0
27 83 48
ESC S 1
27 83 49
ESC T
27 84
ESC U 0
27 85 48
ESC U 1
27 85 49
xxx
Function
Set vertical tabs
Set page length in lines.
Set page length in inches.
Clear horizontal tab settings.
Set horizontal tab
Emphasized printing on
Emphasized printing off
Enhanced printing on
Enhanced printing off
Execute n/180" line feed.
Begin single density graphics
Double density graphics
Select 12 cpi
Skip over perforation on
Skip over perforation off
Select 10 cpi
Set right margin
Select international character/Code Page
set
Start superscript printing
Start subscript printing
Stop superscript/ subscript printing
Uni-directional printing off
Uni-directional printing on
Epson LQ Command Summary
Applies to Model(s)
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
Page
94
85
85
76
73
36
36
36
36
88
62
62
15
99
99
15
70
10
20
20
20
82
82
Epson LQ Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC W 0
27 87 48
ESC W 1
27 87 49
ESC X p Pn Lp Hp
27 88 70 Pn Lp Hp
ESC Y Ln Hn [data]
27 89 Ln Hn [data]
ESC Z Ln Hn [data]
27 90 Ln Hn [data]
ESC [ n
27 91 n
ESC \ Ln Hn
27 92 Ln Hn
ESC ] n
27 93 n
ESC a 0
27 97 48
ESC a 1
27 97 49
ESC a 2
27 97 50
ESC a 3
27 97 51
ESC b m n1 n2 ... nk NUL
27 98 m n1 n2 ... nk 0
ESC c Lp Hp
27 99 Lp Hp
ESC g
27 103
ESC i 0
27 105 48
ESC i 1
27 105 49
ESC j n
27 106 n
ESC k n
27 107 n
ESC l n
27 108 n
ESC I 0
27 73 48
ESC I 1
27 73 49
ESC n Pn
27 110 Pn
Function
End double width printing
Double speed/double density graphics
Applies to Model(s)
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T
Quadruple density graphics
ML390T/391T
62
Set line spacing to n/360"
92
Incremental printing off
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T
Incremental printing on
ML390T/391T
82
n/180" reverse line feed
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T
89
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390/391T,
ML590/591
ML390/391T,
ML590/591
ML390/391T,
ML590/591
70
Begin double width printing
Select character pitch/point size
Set relative dot position
Perform n/360" line feed
Left justification
Center justification
Right justification
Full (left and right) justification
Set vertical format unit (VFU)
Set Horizontal Motion Index
Select 15 cpi
Specify typeface
Set left margin
Cancel printing upper range control codes
Permit printing upper range control codes
Select Graphics Aspect Ratio
Epson LQ Command Summary
Page
21
21
17
62
80
88
83
83
83
83
95
27
15
82
30
13
13
65
xxxi
Epson LQ Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC p 0
27 112 48
ESC p 1
27 112 49
ESC q n
27 113 n
ESC r n
27 114 n
ESC s 0
27 115 48
ESC s 1
27 115 49
ESC t 0
27 116 48
ESC t 1
27 116 49
ESC t 2
27 116 50
ESC x n
27 120 n
ESC } NUL
27 125 0
DEL
127
xxxii
Function
Proportional spacing off
Proportional spacing on
Specify outline/shadow
Select color
Half-speed printing off
Half-speed printing on
Select Epson Set 1
Select Epson Set 2
Select Custom Character Set
Specify print quality
Software I-Prime
Delete one character
Epson LQ Command Summary
Applies to Model(s)
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML590/591
Page
25
ML390T/ML391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/ML391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T ,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T ,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T ,
ML590/591
ML390T/391T,
ML590/591
ML390/391T,
ML590/591
ML390T/ML391T,
ML590/591
127
25
38
130
127
7
7
51
29
131
127
Okidata MICROLINE Standard Commands
ML Standard Command: ASCII
Decimal
ETX
3
ETX STX
32
ETX ETX
33
ETX LF
3 10
ETX SO
3 14
ETX DC2
3 18
ETX DC4
3 20
BS
8
HT
9
LF
10
VT
11
VT n
11 n
FF
12
CR
13
DC1
17
DC3
19
DC4 SP1...SP1 n ... SP...SP ?
20 32...32 n ... 32...32 63
CAN
24
ESC ETX x1y1z1w1 ... x16y16z16w16 CR
27 3 x1y1z1w1 ... x16y16z16w16 13
ESC ETX 0 CR
27 3 48 13
ESC HT CR
27 9 13
xxxiv
Function
Select graphics print mode
End graphics print mode
Store graphics data in one dot
column buffer
Graphics line feed with
carriage return, text setting
Graphics line feed with
carriage return, graphics
setting
Graphics line feed without
carriage return, text setting
Graphics line feed without
carriage return, graphics
setting
Backspace
Execute horizontal tab
Line feed (with carriage
return)
Vertical tab
Execute VFU vertical tab
Form feed
Carriage return
Print suppress mode off
Print suppress mode on
Set vertical format unit (VFU)
Cancel
Set horizontal tab by dot
columns
Clear horizontal tabs set by
dot columns
Clear horizontal tab settings
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Page
59
59
60
60
60
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
60
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
69
Okidata MICROLINE Standard Command Summary
60
73
87
94
96
87
69
129
129
96
125
74
76
76
ML Standard Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC HT x1y1z1 ... x16y16z16 CR
27 9 x1y1z1 ... x16y16z16 13
ESC LF
27 10
ESC VT Hn Ln
27 11 Hn Ln
ESC DLE @ Pn a1 a2 P1 P2 P3 P4
27 16 64 Pn a1 a2 P1 P2 P3 P4
ESC DLE A m n1 ... n8
27 16 65 m n1 ... n8
ESC DLE B m n [data]
27 16 66 m n [data]
ESC DLE C P1 [data]
27 16 67 P1 [data]
ESC DC2
27 18
ESC CAN
27 24
ESC US 0
27 31 48
ESC US 1
27 31 49
ESC ! n
27 33 n
ESC ! *
27 33 42
ESC ! /
27 33 47
ESC ! 0
27 33 48
ESC ! 1
27 33 49
ESC ! 2
27 33 50
ESC # 0
27 35 48
ESC # 3
27 35 51
ESC # Q
27 35 81
ESC $
27 36
ESC % 5 n
27 37 53 n
ESC % 9 n
27 37 57 n
Function
Set horizontal tab by
characters
Reverse feed
Skip down selected number
of lines
Set multiple print positions
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Select bar code type and size
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Print bar code data
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Print Postnet bar code data
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Graphics line feed without
carriage return)
Initialize printer
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
End double height printing
Begin double height printing
Select international character
set
Italics printing off
Italics printing on
Select standard character set
Select block graphics
character set
Select line character set
Select HSD print mode
Select 20 cpi
Double speed/ quadruple
density graphics
Copy ROM character set to
RAM character set
Perform n/144" feed
Set spacing to n/144"
Okidata MICROLINE Standard Command Summary
xxxv
Page
74
89
96
77
101112
101112
101,
112
87
127
21
21
9
35
35
8
8
8
29
17
55
45
88
90
ML Standard Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC % A m n1 ... n11
27 37 65 m n1 ... n11
ESC % B n1 n2 n3 n4
27 37 66 n1 n2 n3 n4
ESC % C n1 n2 n3
27 37 67 n1 n2 n3
ESC % D m n1 ... n11
27 37 68 m n1 ... n11
ESC % E n1 n2 n3 n4
27 37 69 n1 n2 n3 n4
ESC % F n1 n2 n3 n4
27 37 70 n1 n2 n3 n4
ESC % R n1 n2 n3 n4
27 37 82 n1 n2 n3 n4
ESC % S 0
27 37 83 48
ESC % S 1
27 37 83 49
ESC & n1 n2 n3 n4 :
27 38 n1 n2 n3 n4 58
ESC * n1 n2 :
27 42 n1 n2 58
ESC 27 45
ESC 0
27 48
ESC 1
27 49
ESC 2
27 50
ESC 3
27 51
ESC 5
27 53
ESC 6
27 54
ESC 7
27 55
ESC 8
27 56
ESC <
27 60
ESC =
27 61
ESC >
27 62
xxxvi
Function
Down load ascender
characters
Indent from left margin
Set left margin
Down load descender
characters
Move to right
Move to left
Set right margin
Skip over perforation off
Skip over perforation on
Select print features
Select graphics mode
Uni-directional printing on
Select Utility print mode
Select NLQ print mode
Select DLL in Utility mode
Select NLQ Gothic font
Set top of form
Set spacing to 1/6"
Select DLL NLQ mode
Set spacing to 1/8"
Half-speed printing on
Uni-directional printing off
Half-speed printing off
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Okidata MICROLINE Standard Command Summary
Page
45
76
72
45
81
81
72
100
100
24
57
82
29
29
45
29
98
90
45
90
127
82
127
ML Standard Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC ? n :
27 63 n 58
ESC C
27 67
ESC D
27 68
ESC E 0
27 69 48
ESC E 1
27 69 49
ESC F Hn Ln
27 70 Hn Ln
ESC G Hn Ln
26 71 Hn Ln
ESC H
27 72
ESC J
27 74
ESC K
27 75
ESC L
27 76
ESC M
27 77
ESC N n
27 78 n
ESC P
27 80
ESC Q
27 81
ESC R
27 82
ESC S
27 83
ESC T
27 84
ESC V
27 86
ESC Y
27 89
ESC Z
27 90
ESC [ T Ln Hn NUL NUL Hcp Lcp NUL
27 91 84 Ln Hn 0 0 Hcp Lcp 0
ESC g
27 103
Function
Carriage return/feed selection
Print from code page
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
Select 15 cpi
ML520/521
Underline printing on
Underline printing off
Paper-out sensor on
Paper-out sensor off
Page length set in lines
Page length set in inches
Enhanced printing on
Start superscript printing
Stop superscript printing
Start subscript printing
Stop subscript printing
Set intercharacter spacing
Single density graphics
Single density graphics
Double density graphics
Insert sheet (Cut Sheet Feeder)
Emphasized printing on
Eject sheet (Cut Sheet Feeder)
Proportional spacing on
Proportional spacing off
Okidata MICROLINE Standard Command Summary
Page
87
36
36
128
128
85
85
36
20
20
20
20
26
55
55
55
126
36
126
25
25
11
15
xxxvii
ML Standard Command: ASCII
Decimal
ESC I 0
27 105 48
ESC I 1
27 105 49
ESC I
27 108
ESC { n
27 123 n
ESC } NUL
27 125 0
FS
28
GS
29
RS
30
US
31
xxxviii
Function
Incremental printing on
Applies to Model(s)
ML320/321T
Page
82
Incremental printing off
ML320/321T
82
Emphasized/enhanced
printing off
Change emulation
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321T,
ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
ML320/321 Std.,
ML320T/321T, ML520/521
36
Software I-Prime
Select 12 cpi
Select 17.1 cpi
Select 10 cpi
Begin double width printing
Okidata MICROLINE Standard Command Summary
125
131
15
15
15
21
Chapter 1: Printer Drivers
Usable Drivers
The tables below summarize usable drivers for each printer emulation. They are listed in order
by decreasing compatibility as you go down the list: select one from as high up on the list as
possible, based on what is available from among the drivers supplied with your software. If you
don’t see one from near the top of the list, give the software manufacturer a call to see if they
have added any drivers to those supplied when you purchased your software.
Table 1: Printer Drivers for ML320 Epson/IBM & ML321 Epson/IBM
IBM Proprinter Emulation
Epson FX Emulation
IBM Proprinter II
IBM Proprinter
IBM Graphics Printer
Epson FX86/286
Epson FX
Epson EX800/1000
Table 2: Printer Drivers for ML320 MICROLINE Standard
& ML321 MICROLINE Standard
Okidata ML Emulation
Okidata Microline 320/321
Okidata Microline 292/293
Okidata Microline 192+/193+
Okidata Microline 192/193
Okidata Microline 182/183
Okidata Microline 92/93
Table 3: Printer Drivers for Models ML320 Turbo & ML321 Turbo
IBM Proprinter Emulation
Epson FX Emulation
Okidata ML Standard Emulation
Okidata ML 320/1T IBM
IBM Proprinter III
IBM Proprinter II
IBM Proprinter
IBM Graphics Printer
Okidata ML 320/1T Epson
Epson FX286e
Epson FX850/1050
Epson FX86/286
Epson FX
Epson FX800/1000
Okidata Microline 320/321T
Okidata Microline 520/521
Okidata Microline 320/321
Okidata Microline 292/293
Okidata Microline 192/193
Okidata Microline 182/183
Table 4: Printer Drivers for Models ML390 Turbo & ML391 Turbo
IBM Proprinter Emulation
IBM X24e AGM/XLe AGM Emulation
Epson LQ Emulation
Okidata ML390/1T IBM
IBM Proprinter X24e/XL24e
IBM Proprinter X24/XL24
IBM Proprinter XL
Use this emulation only when you have
selected an IBM Proprinter X24e/XL24e
driver and you need to use Epson LQ
high-density graphics.
Okidata ML390/1T Epson
Epson LQ 870/1170
Epson LQ 80/1000
Epson LQ 2500
Epson LQ 1500
Epson LQ 1050
Chapter 1: Working with Commercial Software
1
Table 5: Printer Drivers for Models ML520 & ML521
IBM Proprinter Emulation
Epson FX Emulation
Okidata ML Standard Emulation
Okidata ML 520/1 IBM
IBM Proprinter III
IBM Proprinter II
IBM Proprinter
IBM Graphics Printer
Okidata ML 520/1 Epson
Epson FX850/1050
Epson FX86/286
Epson FX
Epson EX800/1000
Okidata Microline 520/521
Okidata Microline 320/321
Okidata Microline 292/293
Okidata Microline 192/193
Okidata Microline 182/183
Okidata Microline 92/93
Table 6: Printer Drivers for Models ML590 & ML591
IBM Proprinter Emulation
IBM X24e AGM/XLe AGM Emulation
Epson LQ Emulation
Okidata ML590/1 IBM
IBM Proprinter X24e/XL24e
IBM Proprinter X24/XL24
IBM Proprinter XL
Use this emulation only when you
have selected an IBM Proprinter
X24e/XL24e driver and you need to
use Epson LQ high-density graphics.
Okidata ML590/1 Epson
Epson LQ 850/1050
Epson LQ 860/2250 (use for color
printing)
Epson LQ 2500
Epson LQ 1500
Epson LQ
Because there are some differences in characteristics such as speed or access to various
features, you may wish to experiment with different drivers.
If you must select a driver that is not listed in the table, be sure to check it thoroughly for print
features such as boldface, underline and changes in pitch. Don’t be surprised if boldfaced
items are printed twice, underlines are misplaced, wide spaces are left between lines or the
printer behaves chaotically (turn off the printer if the latter occurs). These are all characteristics
of an incompatible driver selection.
OKIDATA Software Drivers
Software Drivers Online
For fastest service, you can download the latest drivers for your printer directly through
• the Okidata WorldWide Web site: http://www.okidata.com
• the Okidata OKILINK BBS: (609) 234-5344
®
• CompuServe :
®
1. GO PCHW
2. In Library #2, select “Printer Utilities.”
2
Chapter 1: Working with Commercial Software
Table 7: Available Drivers
Printer Models
Available Drivers
If you can not download the driver:
ML320 Epson/IBM
ML320 Std.
ML321 Epson/IBM
ML321 Std.
Microsoft Windows: 3.0, 3.1, 95
Microsoft Word (DOS): 5.0, 5.5, 6.0
WordPerfect (DOS): 5.1, 5.2, 6.0
To obtain a 3½
" HD diskette containing these
drivers, call 1-800-OKIDATA.
ML320 Turbo
ML321 Turbo
Microsoft Windows 3.1x, 95,
NT 3.51
To obtain a3½
" HD diskette containing the
driver you need, send a written request to
OKIDATA
PO Box 4603
Trenton, NJ 08650-9852
Select one:
#MS-9267 for Windows 3.1x
#MS-9299 for Windows 95
#MS-9300 for Windows NT
ML390 Turbo
ML391 Turbo
Microsoft Windows 3.1x, 95,
NT 3.51, NT 4.0
To obtain a3½
" HD diskette containing the
driver you need, send a written request to
OKIDATA
PO Box 4603
Trenton, NJ 08650-9852
Select one:
#MS-9351 for Windows 3.1x
#MS-9352 for Windows 95
#MS-9353 for Windows NT 3.51
#MS-9354 for Windows NT 4.0
ML520
ML521
Microsoft Windows: 3.0, 3.1, 95
Microsoft Word (DOS): 5.0, 5.5, 6.0
WordPerfect (DOS): 5.1, 5.2, 6.0
To obtain a diskette containing all these
drivers, send a written request to
OKIDATA
PO Box 4603
Trenton, NJ 08650-9852
Select one:
#MS-8838 for 3½
" HD diskette
#MS-8839 for 5¼
" HD diskette
ML590
ML591
Microsoft Windows: 3.0, 3.1, 95
Microsoft Word (DOS): 5.0, 5.5, 6.0
WordPerfect (DOS): 5.1, 5.2, 6.0
Drivers are shipped with the printer
Chapter 1: Working with Commercial Software
3
Software Driver Selection
Selecting a software printer driver is usually a part of the software application installation
process. Changing printers may require use of an external routine, or may be possible from
within the application through menu selection.
Note: Refer to your software documentation for information on installing printer drivers.
Embedded Commands
In some cases, commercial software packages will permit you to create and/or modify the
printer driver. Even if a driver specifically designed for the printer is available, this option can
provide additional room for customization.
Typically, the driver modification routine will present a list of operations with some method for
entering printer commands, permitting substitution, such as entering the italic command in
place of the underline command. It also permits modification of an existing driver to better fit
your printer. Driver modification does require a basic familiarity with your printer’s command
set, so you should study the control codes in the chapters which follow thoroughly before
attempting it.
Some programs also permit you to control your printer directly through embedded commands.
Usage of these commands in programs can provide access to a wide range of printer
capabilities that are not ordinarily supported, or, in programs like older versions of Lotus 1-2-3,
printer commands can be entered as an initialization string to set the basic format for a
document.
4
Chapter 1: Working with Commercial Software
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
This chapter describes the character set commands for your printer, including
•
•
•
•
•
•
IBM Character Sets I, II, and III
Epson Character Sets
Microline Character Sets
International Character Sets
Code Page Character Sets
Upper Range Control Codes
• Character Table Selection
Special character sets can be substituted for the standard ASCII characters to provide foreign
characters, line draw characters, non-printable characters such as back space (BS), form feed
(FF), vertical tab (VT), etc. One of the Epson Character Sets provides italics characters.
IBM Character Set Commands
Select IBM Set I Command (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Select IBM Set I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
ASCII
Dec
Hex
ESC 7
27 55
1B 37
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
This command selects IBM Character Set I in the IBM Proprinter emulation.
Select IBM Set II Command (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Select IBM Set II
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
ASCII
ESC 6
Dec
27 54
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 36
This command selects IBM Character Set II in the IBM Proprinter emulation.
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
5
Select All Character Set [IBM Set III] Command (Epson LQ)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Select All Character Set
ESC ( ^ Ln Hn [data]
27 40 94 Ln Hn[data]
1B 28 5E Ln Hn[data]
Use this command to engage the All Character Set (IBM Set III) and apply it to the data which
follows the command. This allows normally non-printable characters to print.
Parameters Ln and Hn
Parameters Ln and Hn are used to designate how many characters you wish to print using the All
Character set:
Number of characters = Ln + (Hn x 256)
For fewer than 256 characters, substitute the number of characters for Ln and set Hn = 0. For
more than 256 characters, divide the number of characters by 256 and assign the whole
number result to Hn, then assign the remainder to Ln.
Ln and Hn can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal.
Print Data from IBM All Characters Set [IBM Set III] Command (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Print Specified Data from
IBM All Characters Set
ASCII
ESC \ Ln Hn
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Dec
27 92 Ln Hn
Hex
1B 5C Ln Hn
This command will print the amount of data you specify within the command, using the IBM
All Characters set (also known as Character Set III).
The IBM All Characters set contains only printable characters with the exception of decimal
codes 0 and 255, and gives you a broad range of graphics characters and other special
symbols. This set is also a handy debugging tool for programmers, since you can print out and
examine files that contain control codes and escape sequences.
In the above command, you must use parameters Ln and Hn to specify the total count of
characters to be printed. The total count is calculated as
Ln + (Hn x 256)
If you are printing fewer than 256 characters, substitute the number of characters for the value
of Ln and replace Hn with 0.
If you are printing 256 or more characters, divide the total number of characters you wish to
print by 256. Replace Hn with the whole number result and assign the remainder to Ln.
6
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
Print One Character from IBM All Character Set [IBM Set III] Command (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Print Specified Character from IBM Set III
ASCII
ESC ^ n
Dec
27 94 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 5E n
This command will print only the one character you specify within the command, using IBM
Character Set III (also known as the All Characters set).
When the printer receives this command, it will print the character “n” from IBM Character Set
III. The value of n can be from 0 to 255 decimal (00 to FF hexadecimal).
Epson Character Set Commands
Select Epson Set 1 [Slanted Characters] Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Select Epson Set 1
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
ASCII
ESC t 0
Dec
27 116 48
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 74 30
In the Epson emulation, this command specifies Epson Character Set 1 for the upper ASCII
range (decimal 128 to 256). Epson Character Set 1 contains slanted characters, equivalent to
italics.
Select Epson Set 2 [Graphics Characters] Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Select Epson Set 2
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
ASCII
ESC t 1
Dec
27 116 49
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 74 31
In the Epson emulation, this command specifies Epson Character Set 2 for the upper ASCII
range (decimal 128 to 256). Epson Character Set 2 contains graphics characters.
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
7
MICROLINE Character Set Commands
Select MICROLINE Standard Character Set Command (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Select Standard Character Set
ASCII
ESC ! 0
Dec
27 33 48
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 21 30
In the Microline emulation, use this command to specify the standard Microline symbol set.
Select MICROLINE Block Graphics Symbol Set Command (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Select Block Graphics Symbol Set
ASCII
ESC ! 1
Dec
27 33
49
Hex
1B 21 31
In the Microline emulation, use this command to specify a set of block graphics characters that
can be used for drawing simple images and bar graphs. This set of characters has the standard
ASCII characters decimal 32 through 127 and the block graphics in the upper ASCII range,
decimal 128 through 255.
Select MICROLINE Line Character Set Command (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Select Line Character Set
ASCII
ESC ! 2
Dec
27 33 50
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 21 32
In the Microline emulation, use this command to specify the IBM (line graphics) symbol set
which is comparable to IBM Set II. This set of characters has the standard ASCII characters
decimal 32 through 127 and the line graphics in the upper ASCII characters, decimal 128
through 255.
8
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
International Character Set Commands
These commands allow you to select special international character sets which replace
less-frequently used characters with symbols used in a variety of European languages or in the
publishing industry.
Select International Character Set Command (IBM/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select International Character Set
ASCII
ESC ! n
Dec
27 33 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 21 n
To access these characters, replace the n in the command with the appropriate value taken
from column two in the table below.
Table 8: IBM/ML ESC ! Command —
International Character Substitutions
Character Corresponding to Decimal Value
Language
American
(slashed zero)
American
(unslashed zero)
n
35
36
38
48
64
79
91
92
93
94
95
96
123
124
125
126
64
#
$
&
Ø
@
O
[
\
]
^
-
‘
{
|
}
~
British
65
#
$
&
0
@
O
[
\
]
^
-
‘
{
|
}
~
66
£
$
&
0
@
O
[
\
]
^
_
‘
{
|
}
~
Danish
70
#
$
&
0
@
O
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
_
`
æ
Ø
å
ü
Dutch
72
£
$
&
0
@
O
[
IJ
]
^
_
‘
{
IJ
}
~
French
68
£
$
&
0
à
O
·
ç
§
^
_
‘
é
ù
è
û
French Canadian
74
ü
$
ë
Ø
à
Ø
â
ç
ê
î
ï
ô
é
ù
è
û
German
67
#
$
&
0
§
O
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
_
‘
ä
ö
ü
ß
Italian
73
£
$
&
Ø
§
O
°
ç
é
^
_
ù
à
ò
è
ì
Latin American
76
#
$
&
0
à
O
¡
Ñ
¿
é
_
ü
ì
ñ
ó
ú
Norwegian
71
#
$
&
0
@
O
Æ
Ø
Å
^
_
•
æ
Ø
å
~
Publisher
90
#
$
&
0
§
O
°
‘
“
¶
±*
`
©
®
†
™
Spanish
75
!
$
&
0
¡
O
Ñ
ñ
¿
ü
_
á
é
í
ó
ú
Swedish
69
§
¤
&
0
É
O
Ä
Ö
Å
^
_
é
ä
ö
å
ü
* For Models ML520 and ML521, character position number 95 in the Publisher Character Set is _ (underscore).
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
9
Select International Character Set Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select International Character Set
ASCII
ESC R n
Dec
27 82 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 52 n
This command is used to use characters from the specified international character set to replace
the standard characters. To access these characters, replace m in the command with the
appropriate value taken from column two in the table below. For the ML390 Turbo and ML391
Turbo printers, substitute the value of n given in Table 3 to engage characters from the Code
Page indicated.
Table 9: Epson ESC R Command —
International Character Substitutions
Decimal Value of Character
Language
n
35
36
38
64
79
91
92
93
94
95
96
123
124
125
126
American
0
#
$
&
@
O
[
\
]
^
-
‘
{
|
}
~
British
3
£
$
&
@
O
[
\
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
~
Danish I
4
#
$
&
@
O
Æ
Ø
Å
^
_
`
æ
Ø
å
~
Danish II
10
#
$
&
É
O
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
_
é
æ
Ø
å
ü
Dutch
14
£
$
&
@
O
[
IJ
]
^
_
`
{
ij
}
~
1
#
$
&
à
O
•
ç
§
^
_
`
é
ù
è
Ѡ
13
ü
$
ë
à
Ø
â
ç
ê
î
ï
ô
é
ù
è
û
German
2
#
$
&
§
O
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
_
‘
ä
ö
ü
ß
Italian
6
#
$
&
@
O
•
\
é
^
_
ù
à
ò
è
ì
Japanese
8
#
$
&
@
O
[
¥
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
~
12
#
$
&
à
O
¡
Ñ
¿
é
_
ü
í
ñ
ó
û
9
#
¤
&
É
O
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
_
é
æ
Ø
å
ü
64
#
$
&
§
O
°
‘
¨
¶
±*
`
©
®
†
Spanish I
7
Pt
$
&
@
O
¡
Ñ
¿
^
_
`
¨
ñ
}
~
Spanish II
11
#
$
&
à
O
¡
Ñ
¿
é
_
`
í
ñ
ó
ú
5
#
¤
&
É
O
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
_
é
ä
ö
å
ü
French
French Canadian
Latin American
Norwegian
Publisher
Swedish
* For Models ML520 and ML521, character position number 95 in the Publisher Character Set is _ (underscore).
Table 10: Epson ESC R Command —
Code Page Selections for ML390/391 Turbo
Code Page
Abicomp
BRASCII
Canada French
Multilingual 850
Norway 865
Portugual
Value of n
81
80
43
26
27
28
Print from Code Page Command (IBM/ML)
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
10
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
Function
Print from Code Page
ASCII
ESC [ T Ln Hn 0 0
Hcp Lcp 0
Dec
27 91 84 Ln Hn 0 0
Hcp Lcp 0
Hex
1B 5B 54 Ln Hn 00
00
Hcp Lcp 00
This command permits you to select a Code Page character set and to print the amount of data
you specify within the command from that Code Page set. It applies to both the IBM emulation
(all models listed) and the Okidata Microline emulation (Models ML320/321 Turbo and
ML520/521 only).
Parameters Ln and Hn
These parameters specify the total count of characters to be printed. The total count is
calculated as
Ln + (Hn x 256)
If you are printing less than 256 characters, substitute the number of characters for the value of
Ln and replace Hn with 0.
If you are printing 256 or more characters, divide the total number of characters you wish to
print by 256. Replace Ln with the whole number result and assign the remainder to Hn.
Parameters Hcp and Lcp
These parameters specify the Code Page set to be used when printing the characters as given in
the table below.
Table 11: IBM/ML ESC [ T Command —
Code Page Parameters
Hcp value
1
3
3
3
3
4
4
Lcp value
181
82
92
95
97
16
17
Code Page Set
USA
Multilingual
Canadian French
Portugal
Norway
BRASCII*
Abicomp*
*ML320/321 Turbo and ML390/391 Turbo only.
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
11
Assign Code Page Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Assign Code Page to
Character Set
ASCII
ESC ( t 3 0
Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
Dec
27 40 116 51 48
Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
Hex
1B 28 74 33 30
Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
This command allows you to assign a Code Page character set (see Apendix C) to Epson
Character Set 1 or Set 2, which you can then select using ESC t 0 or ESC t 1, respectively.
Parameter Pn1
This parameter specifies which character set you are replacing with a Code Page set:
Pn1 = 0: replaces Epson Character Set 1
Pn1 = 1: replaces Epson Character Set 2
Parameters Pn2 and Pn3
These parameters specify the Code Page set assigned to the designated Epson Character Set, as
given in the table below.
Table 12: Epson 9-Pin ESC ( t Command —
Code Page Parameters for Pn2 and Pn3 Values
Pn2 Hex Value
0
1
3
8
7
9
25
26
12
Pn3 Hex Vvalue
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Code Page Set
Italic
PC437 (USA)
PC850 (Multilingual)
PC863 (Canadian French)
PC860 (Portugal)
PC865 (Norway)
BRASCII
Abicomp
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
Upper Range Control Code Commands (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Permit Printing Upper
Range Control Codes
ASCII
ESC 6
or
ESC I 1*
ESC 7
or
ESC I 0*
Cancel Printing Upper
Range Control Codes
Dec
27 54
or
27 73 49*
27 55
or
27 73 48*
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 36
or
1B 49 31*
1B 37
or
1B 49 30*
* Not available for ML390 Turbo or ML391 Turbo.
In the Epson emulation, the ASCII characters from decimal 128 through 159 are normally
interpreted as control codes and cannot be printed. In some cases, you may wish to store
custom characters in these locations.
The ESC 6 and ESC 7 commands allow you to print custom characters stored in these areas and
then return to ”normal” printing. These commands are not necessary in the ML590 and ML591
printers.
The ESC I n command allows you to print custom charters stored in the following ASCII areas:
00H to 06H, 10H, 11H, 15H to 17H, 19H to 1AH, 1CH to 1FH, 80H to 86H, 90H, 91H, 95H
to 97H, 99H, 9AH, or 9CH to 9FH.
Select Code Page Set Command (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Select Code Page Set
ESC ( t Ln Hn Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
27 40 116 Ln Hn Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
1B 28 74 Ln Hn Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
Use this command to store any four code page sets from the table below, engaged using the
ESC t n command.
Parameters Ln and Hn
Parameters Ln and Hn are used to designate the number of bytes to follow in the subsequent
parameters, where
Number of bytes = Ln + (Hn x 256)
Ln and Hn can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal. Generally, Ln is set to 3 and Hn is set to 0.
Parameter Pn1
Parameter Pn1 selects the table area in which the four code page sets will be stored. You can
assign it to hexadecimal 00, 01, 02, 03, 30, 31, 32, or 33.
Parameters Pn2 and Pn3
Parameters Pn2 and Pn3 determine which code page set will be used, as follows:
Table 13: Epson 24-Pin ESC ( t Command —
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
13
Code Page Sets for Pn1, Pn2 Values
Pn2
0
1
3
7
8
9
25*
26*
Pn3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0*
0*
Code Page Set
Italic
PC-437 (USA)
PC-850 (Multilingual)
PC-860 (Portugal)
PC-863 (Canadian French)
PC-865 (Norway)
BRASCII*
Abicomp*
* Applies only to ML390 Turbo and ML391 Turbo
For example, use the command
ESC ( t 03H 00H 03H 09H 00H
to store the PC-865 Norwegian code page set in table area 03.
14
Chapter 2: Character Set Commands
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
This chapter describes the commands used to set the size and spacing of characters printed:
•
•
•
•
•
Pitch Setting Commands
Superscript & Subscript Commands
Double Width & Height Commands
Combined Print Features Command
Character Spacing Commands
Pitch Setting Commands
These commands are used to select the pitch in characters per inch (cpi) used. For example, at
10 cpi, each character is 1/10" wide. The number of characters that will fit on a line depends
on the pitch you have selected and on whether you have a narrow carriage or a wide carriage
printer. You can also set pitch using the printer's front panel or the menu (see “Menu Mode” in
your printer manual).
Table 14: Pitch Setting Commands —
Characters Per Line (CPL) for Pitches
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi*
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Characters per Line
Narrow Carriage Models Wide Carriage Models
80 cpl
136 cpl
96 cpl
163 cpl
120 cpl *
204 cpl *
137 cpl
233 cpl
160 cpl
272 cpl
* 15 cpi is not available on Models ML320/1 E/I, ML320/1 Std. or ML320/1 Turbo.
Pitch Setting Commands for Non-compressed Printing (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Select 10 cpi
Select 12 cpi
Select 15 cpi*
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Command: IBM
ASCII: DC2
Dec: 18
Hex: 12
ASCII: ESC :
Dec: 27 58
Hex: 1B 3A
ASCII: ESC g
Dec: 27 103
Hex: 1B 67
Command: Epson
ASCII: ESC P
Dec: 27 80
Hex: 1B 50
ASCII: ESC M
Dec: 27 77
Hex: 1B 4D
ASCII: ESC g
Dec: 27 103
Hex: 1B 67
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Command: ML
ASCII: RS
Dec: 30
Hex: 1E
ASCII: FS
Dec: 28
Hex: 1C
ASCII: ESC g
Dec: 27 103
Hex: 1B 67
* 15 cpi is not available on Models ML320/1 E/I, ML320/1 Std. or ML320/1 Turbo.
Pitch Setting Commands for Compressed Printing (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
15
Function
Select Compressed Pitch
Cancel Compressed Pitch
Command
ASCII: SI or ESC SI
Dec: 15 or 27 15
Hex: 0F or 1B 0F
Not applicable
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select
Compressed
Pitch*
Command
ASCII: SI or ESC SI
Dec: 15 or 27 15
Hex: 0F or 1B 0F
Notes
SI Select item in the printer Menu must be set to
12 CPI in order to select compressed pitch.
If 10 cpi character pitch is engaged, printer will
go to 17.1 cpi pitch.
If 12 cpi character pitch is engaged, printer will
go to 20 cpi pitch.
* To cancel compressed pitch, enter one of the non-compressed printing pitch setting
commands.
Pitch Setting Commands for Compressed Printing (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select Compressed Pitch
Command
ASCII: SI or ESC SI
Dec: 15 or 27 15
Hex: 0F or 1B 0f
Cancel Compressed Pitch
ASCII: DC2
Dec: 18
Hex: 12
16
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Notes
If 10 cpi is engaged, compressed
pitch will be 17.1 cpi
If 12 cpi is engaged, compressed
pitch will be 20 cpi.
If 17.1 cpi is engaged, pitch will
revert to 10 cpi.
If 20 cpi is engaged, pitch will
revert to 12 cpi.
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
Pitch Setting Commands for Compressed Printing (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Select 17.1 cpi
Select 20 cpi
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ASCII: GS
ASCII: ESC # 3
Dec.
Dec: 29
Dec: 27 35 51
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex.
Hex: 1D
Hex: 1B 23 33
Select Character Pitch/Point Size Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Select Character Pitch/Point Size
ESC X p Pn Lp Hp
27 88 70 Pn Lp Hp
1B 58 46 Pn Lp Hp
Use this command to place the printer in the scalable font mode and to select the character
pitch and the point size. Character pitch setting range is 5 to 20 characters per inch (cpi); point
size setting range is 8 to 64 points.
For the ML590 and ML591 printers, you can select any character pitch from 5 to 20 cpi for the
LQ Courier, LQ Roman and LQ Swiss typefaces. The Gothic, Orator, Prestige and Swiss Bold
typefaces will only print in point sizes 10, 10.5 and 21. The table below shows which typeface
will print in other sizes when these typefaces are selected.
Note: If you wish to use this command to print to an ML320/321 Turbo printer in a UNIX
environment, you must reboot the system after the command is entered.
Table 15: Epson ESC X Command —
Font Substitution for Models ML590 & ML591
Typeface
Gothic
Orator
Prestige
Swiss Bold
Typeface that Prints
8 Point 12 to 20 & 22 to 64 Point
Swiss
Courier
Swiss
Courier
Roman Courier
Swiss
Courier
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
17
Parameter Pn
Parameter Pn is used to set the character pitch. It can have any value from 0 to 127 decimal for
ML320/321 Turbo and for ML590/591 printers, or from 0 to 255 for ML390/391 Turbo.
Table 16: Epson ESC X Command — Character Pitch Settings for Pn Values
Pn
0
1
18 (2 to 19)
20
21 (21 to 23)
24 (24 to 29)
30 (30 to 35)
36 (36 to 41)
42 (42 to 47)
48 (48 to 59)
60 (60 to 71)
72 (72 to 127)
Character Pitch
Remains unchanged
Proportional
20 cpi
18 cpi
17.1 cpi
15 cpi
12 cpi
10 cpi
8.6 cpi
7.5 cpi
6 cpi
5 cpi
Parameters Lp and Hp
Parameters Lp and Hp are used to set the point size according to the following equation:
Np= [Lp + (Hp x 255] x 0.5
Lp and Hp can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal.
Table 17: Epson ESC X Command —
Point Sizes (1 point = 1/72") for Np
Np
Point Size
Np
Point Size
Np
Point Size
Np
Point Size
0
16
20
21
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
Unchanged
8 pt
10 pt
10.5 pt
11 pt
12 pt
13 pt
14 pt
15 pt
16 pt
17 pt
18 pt
19 pt
20 pt
21 pt
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
22 pt
23 pt
24 pt
25 pt
26 pt
27 pt
28 pt
29 pt
30 pt
31 pt
32 pt
33 pt
34 pt
35 pt
36 pt
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
90
92
94
96
98
100
102
104
37 pt
38 pt
39 pt
50 pt
41 pt
42 pt
43 pt
45 pt
46 pt
47 pt
48 pt
49 pt
50 pt
51 pt
52 pt
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
128
53 pt
54 pt
55 pt
56 pt
57 pt
58 pt
59 pt
60 pt
61 pt
62 pt
63 pt
64 pt
18
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
Example
To set a point size (Np) of 216:
Np= [Lp + (Hp x 255] x 0.5
1. Assign a value of 1 to Hp.
2. Multiply 216 by 2: 216 x 2 = 432.
3. Subtract 255 from 432: 432 - 255 = 177., then round this value down to the nearest even
number, 176. Assign this value to Lp.
Here is a sample BASIC program to test your calculated values:
ESC$ = CHR$(27)
LPRINT ESC$; "@";
LPRINT "This is a test of the Select Pitch and Point Size Command."
LPRINT "This is the default text mode."
LPRINT "The characters below should be the maximum character height of 216
points."
LPRINT ESC$; "X"; CHR$(1); CHR$ (176); CHR$(1)
LPRINT "Hy"
Select Character Pitch/Point Size Command (IBM–Oki unique)
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select Character
Pitch/ Point Size
⻬ ML590, ML591
ASCII
Dec
Hex
ESC DLE F Pno Pn Lp Hp
27 16 70 Pno Pn Lp Hp
1B 10 46 Pno Pn Lp Hp
Use this OKI unique command to select printable fonts by character pitch and point size.
Parameter Pno
This parameter is used to give the number of bytes to follow in the subsequent parameters. It
can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal. Generally, a value of 3 is assigned to Pno.
Parameter Pn
Parameter Pn is used to set the character pitch. It can have the following values:
ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo: 0 1o 127
ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo: 0 to 255
ML590, ML591: 0 to 127
See "Table 16: Epson ESC X Command — Character Pitch Settings for Pn Values," above.
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
19
Parameters Lp and Hp
Parameters Lp and Hp are used to set the point size according to the following equation:
Np= [Lp + (Hp x 255] x 0.5
Lp and Hp can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal.
See "Table 17: Epson ESC X Command — Point Sizes for Np Values," above.
Superscript/Subscript Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Start Superscript Printing
Stop Superscript Printing
Start Subscript Printing
Stop Subscript Printing
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
IBM
ASCII: ESC S 0
Dec: 27 83 0
Hex: 1B 53 00
ASCII: ESC T
Dec: 27 84
Hex: 1B 54
ASCII: ESC S 1
Dec: 27 83 1
Hex: 1B 53 01
ASCII: ESC T
Dec: 27 84
Hex: 1B 54
Epson
ASCII: ESC S 0
Dec: 27 83 0
Hex: 1B 53 00
ASCII: ESC T
Dec: 27 84
Hex: 1B 54
ASCII: ESC S 1
Dec: 27 83 1
Hex: 1B 53 01
ASCII: ESC T
Dec: 27 84
Hex: 1B 54
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
ML
ASCII: ESC J
Dec: 27 74
Hex: 1B 4A
ASCII: ESC K
Dec: 27 75
Hex: 1B 4B
ASCII: ESC L
Dec: 27 76
Hex: 1B 4C
ASCII: ESC M
Dec: 27 77
Hex: 1B 4D
Superscript characters are printed above the normal print line, and are used for exponents and
2
special typographic effects (x ). Subscripts are handy for chemical formulas (H2O).
Superscripts and subscripts will print as full-width characters. They cannot be used with
double-height printing.
20
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
Double Width Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Begin Double Width
Printing
End Double Width
Printing
Begin Double Width
Printing Line by Line
End Double Width
Printing Line by Line
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
IBM
ASCII: ESC W 1
Dec: 27 87 49
Hex: 1B 57 31
ASCII: ESC W 0
Dec: 27 87 48
Hex: 1B 57 30
ASCII: SO
Dec: 14
Hex: 0E
ASCII: DC4
Dec: 20
Hex: 14
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Epson
ASCII: ESC W 1
Dec: 27 87 49
Hex: 1B 57 31
ASCII: ESC W 0
Dec: 27 87 48
Hex: 1B 57 30
ASCII: SO or ESC SO
Dec: 14 or 27 14
Hex: 0E or 1B 0E
ASCII: DC4
Dec: 20
Hex: 14
ML
ASCII: US
Dec: 31
Hex: 1F
Use any of the pitch
selection commands.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Double Height Commands (E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Begin Double Height Printing
End Double Height Printing
Epson
ASCII: ESC w 1
Dec: 27 119 1
Hex: 1B 77 01
ASCII: ESC w 0
Dec: 27 119 0
Hex: 1B 77 00
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
ML
ASCII: ESC US 1*
Dec: 27 31 49
Hex: 1B 1F 31
ASCII: ESC US 0*
Dec: 27 31 0
Hex: 1B 1F 00
* This command is also valid for the ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo, ML590 and ML591 in Epson
LQ emulation; it duplicates the ESC w command.
Double height printing produces characters that are twice as tall as normal size characters. it
can be combined with double width and emphasized printing for an even more striking effect.
When you use double height printing, you will need to adjust the line spacing to accommodate
the taller characters.
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
21
Double Width & Height Printing Commands
The double width & height commands allow you to select double width, double height, or
double width and double height printing in the IBM emulation.
Double Width & Height Printing Command, 9-Pin Printers (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Double Width and/or
Height Printing
ASCII
ESC [ @ Ln Hn NUL
NUL n1 n2
Decimal
27 91 64 Ln Hn 0
0 n1 n2
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hexadecimal
1B 5B 40 Ln Hn 00
00 n1 n2
This command lets you specify character width and line spacing in addition to character
height.
Parameters n1 and n2
Parameters n1 and n2 are used to set the width, line spacing and height used. Variable n1 sets
the character height and line spacing; variable n2 sets the character width.
Parameters Ln Hn
These parameters specify the number of bytes of the modes, calculated as
Ln + (Hn x 256)
Generally, Ln is 4 and Hn is 0.
Table 18: IBM ESC [ @ Command —
Character Height/Line Spacing for n1 Values
Decimal Value of n1
0
1
2
16
17
18
32
33
34
Character Height
Unchanged
Standard
Double
Unchanged
Standard
Double
Unchanged
Standard
Double
Line Spacing
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Single
Single
Single
Double
Double
Double
Table 19: IBM ESC [ @ Command — Character Width for n2 Values
Decimal Value of n2
0
1
2
Character Width
Unchanged
Standard
Double
For example, to use double height characters with double the normal line spacing, without
changing the width of the characters use this BASIC statement:
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[@ ";CHR$(4);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(34);CHR$(0)
22
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
Double Height & Width Printing Command, 24-Pin Printers (IBM)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Double Height Printing
ASCII
ESC [ @ n1 n2 m1
m2 m3 m4
Decimal
27 91 64 n1 n2 m1
m2 m3 m4
Hexadecimal
1B 5B 40 n1 n2 m1
m2 m3 m4
Parameters n1 and n2
These variables specify the number of mode bytes in the command. Normally, n1 is set to 4 and
n2 is set to 0.
Parameters m1, m2, m3, m4
These variables control the mode. Parameters m1 and m2 are set to 0. Parameter m3 is used to
set the line spacing and character height. Parameter m4 is used to set the width of the character
as shown in the tables below.
Table 20: IBM ESC [ @ Command —
Character Height/Line Spacing for m3 Values
Decimal Value of m3
0
1
2
16
17
18
32
33
34
Character Height
Unchanged
Standard
Double
Unchanged
Standard
Double
Unchanged
Standard
Double
Line Spacing
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Single
Single
Single
Double
Double
Double
Table 20a: IBM ESC [ @ Command —
Character Width for m4 Values
Decimal Value of m4
0
1
2
Character Width
Unchanged
Standard
Double
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
23
Combined Print Features Command (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Select Print Features
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC & n1 n2 n3 n4 :
⻬ ML520, ML521
Dec
27 38 n1 n2 n3 n4 58
Hex
1B 26 n1 n2 n3 n4 3A
This command lets you select print quality, character pitch, and several other printing features
with a single command. The values of the four variables (n1 n2 n3 n4) determine which features
are selected.
To calculate the value for each variable, first find the features you want in the Variable Values
table below. Next, add the corresponding values from column one for each variable. Then add
the appropriate factor for each variable taken from Table 22.
Table 21: ML ESC & Command —
Print Features for n1, n2, n3 and n4 Values
Value
1
2
4
8
16
n1
10 cpi
12 cpi
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
n2
Cancel super/subscripts
Subscripts
Superscripts
Emphasized
n3
Utility
NLQ
Custom characters
Italics
n4
HSD
N/A
Underlining
Double height
Double width
Enhanced
N/A
N/A
Table 22: ML ESC & Command —
Variable Factors for n1, n2, n3, n4
Variable
n1
n2
n3
n4
Factor
32
64
96
112
Here are some pointers on using this command:
• You don't have to use all four variables; use only the ones that control the features you want
to change.
• You can enter the variables in any order.
• Be sure to add in the variable factor when calculating the variable values—this number tells
the printer which variable is which.
• You'll get unexpected results if you select incompatible features (e.g., if you pick both 10
and 12 cpi), or if you've added up the values incorrectly.
24
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
For example, to set 10 cpi, emphasized, NLQ and underlining using this command, you would
calculate the values for n1, n2, n3, and n4 as follows:
n1 = 1 + 32 = 33
n2 = 8 + 64 = 72
n3 = 2 + 96 = 98
n4 = 4 + 112 = 116
The resulting BASIC statement looks like this:
LPRINT CHR$(27);”&”;CHR$(33);CHR$(72);CHR$(98);CHR$(116);”:”
Character Spacing Commands
The character spacing commands include commands to turn proportional spacing on and off,
as well as commands for increasing the standard spacing between characters at a fixed value.
Proportional Spacing Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Proportional Spacing On
Proportional Spacing Off
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
IBM
ASCII: ESC P 1
Dec: 27 80 1
Hex: 1B 50 01
ASCII: ESC P 0
Dec: 27 80 0
Hex: 1B 50 00
Epson
ASCII: ESC p 1
Dec: 27 112 1
Hex: 1B 70 01
ASCII: ESC p 0
Dec: 27 112 0
Hex: 1B 70 00
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
ML
ASCII: ESC Y
Dec: 27 89
Hex: 1B 59
ASCII: ESC Z
Dec: 27 90
Hex: 1B 5A
In the ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I, ML320 Std., ML321 Std., ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo, ML520,
and ML521, proportional spacing is available only with Near Letter Quality (NLQ) and Utility
(UTL) printing.
In the ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo, ML590 and ML591, proportional spacing is available only
with Letter Quality (LQ) printing.
This command adjusts the space between letters to compensate for the varying widths of
individual characters. Unlike fixed spacing, where all characters are formed within a matrix of
uniform width at a specified pitch, proportional spacing gives more horizontal space to wide
characters, like w or M, and less to narrow characters, like I or f. The resulting print is more
attractive and easier to read than fixed-space printing.
Because the characters have different widths, proportionally spaced fonts have no fixed pitch;
therefore margin settings are only approximate unless your software specifically supports
proportional spacing.
You can also select proportional spacing using the printer menu or the front panel buttons. In
addition, proportional spacing is one of the features available through the composite command
in the Epson mode.
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
25
Intercharacter Spacing Commands (IBM/E/ML)
Note: Intercharacter spacing can NOT be set in the HSD and bit image graphics modes.
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
Function
Set Intercharacter
Spacing
IBM
ASCII: ESC V n
Dec: 27 86 n
Hex: 1B 56 n
Epson
ASCII: ESC SP n
Dec: 27 32 n
Hex: 1B 20 n
ML
ASCII: ESC N n
Dec: 27 78 n
Hex: 1B 4E n
Values for n
n = 0 to 11
n = 0 to 255
n = 0 to 11
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Set Intercharacter Spacing
IBM
ML590/591 Only:
ASCII: ESC SP n
Dec: 27 32 n
Hex: 1B 20 n
Epson
ASCII: ESC SP n
Dec: 27 32 n
Hex: 1B 20 n
Values for n
n = 0 to 255
n = 0 to 255*
* For the ML390 Turbo and ML391 Turbo, bit 7 is ignored.
The standard spacing between characters is 3 dots columns. These commands are used to add
additional spacing between characters, added to the right of each character. The value is
expressed in dots; the number of dots per inch depends on the current print mode. The table
below shows the amount of space added for each cpi setting.
Table 23: IBM ESC V and ESC SP & Epson ESC SP Commands —
Character Spacing (in Inches)
Setting
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Amount of space added
n/120"
n/144"
n/180"
n/206"
n/240"
For example, to add 8/120" spacing to your printing at 10 cpi, use this BASIC command:
LPRINT CHR$(27);"N";CHR$(8)
26
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
Table 24: ML ESC N Command —
Character Spacing (in Inches)
Decimal Value of n
0
1
2
3
10 cpi
3/120"
4/120"
5/120"
6/120"
12 cpi
3/144"
4/144"
5/144"
6/144"
17.1 cpi
3/206"
4/206"
5/206"
6/206"
20 cpi
3/240"
4/240"
5/240"
6/240"
4
7/120"
7/144"
7/206"
7/240"
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
8/120"
9/120"
10/120"
11/120"
12/120"
13/120"
14/120"
8/144"
9/144"
10/144"
11/144"
12/144"
13/144"
14/144"
8/206"
9/206"
10/206"
11/206"
12/206"
13/206"
14/206"
8/240"
9/240"
10/240"
11/240"
12/240"
13/240"
14/240"
For example, if you are printing at 10 cpi and want to set the character spacing at 11/120", use
this BASIC command:
LPRINT CHR$(@7);"N";CHR$(8)
Set Horizontal Motion Index [HMI] Command (Epson LQ)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Set Horizontal Motion Index (HMI)
ASCII
ESC c Lp Hp
Dec
27 99 Lp Hp
Hex
1B 63 Lp Hp
Use this command to set the character spacing in LQ and Utility modes to any value from
1/360" up to 3".
Parameters Lp and Hp
Parameters Lp and Hp can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal and are used to designate the
Horizontal Motion Index (HMI) according to the following equation:
HMI (inches) = [Lp + (Hp x 256)] ÷ 360
If the HMI value is set to greater than 3":
• ML390 Turbo and ML391 Turbo printers will ignore the command
• ML590and ML591 printers will use 1/10" spacing.
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
27
28
Chapter 3: Character Size & Spacing Commands
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
This chapter describes the commands for selecting print style including the following:
• Print Mode & Fonts Commands
• Italics Print Commands
• Emphasized & Enhanced Print Commands
• Underline/Overscore/Strike-Through Commands
• Outline/Shadow Commands
Print Mode & Fonts Commands
Individual Print Mode & Font Commands for 9-Pin Printers (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Select HSD Print Mode
Select Utility Print Mode
IBM
ASCII: ESC # 0
Dec: 27 35 48
Hex: 1B 23 30
See Combined
Commands below
Select NLQ Print Mode
See Combined
Commands below
Select NLQ Gothic Font
See Combined
Commands below
Epson
ASCII: ESC ( 0
Dec: 27 40 48
Hex: 1B 28 30
ASCII: ESC x 0
Dec: 27 120 0
Hex: 1B 78 00
ASCII: ESC x 1
Dec: 27 120 49
Hex: 1B 77 31
and
ASCII: ESC k n
Dec: 27 107 n
Hex: 1B 6B n
Not applicable
⻬ ML520, ML521
ML
ASCII: ESC # 0
Dec: 27 35 48
Hex: 1B 23 30
ASCII: ESC 0
Dec: 27 48
Hex: 1B 30
ASCII: ESC 1
Dec: 27 49
Hex: 1B 31
ASCII: ESC 3
Dec: 27 51
Hex: 1B 33
Use High Speed Draft (HSD) or Utility (UTL) printing for drafts and other documents that you
want to print quickly. HSD is faster and its characters somewhat rougher than utility.
Near Letter Quality (NLQ) printing is slower than HSD and UTL, but the characters are crisper
and more like the characters produced by a typewriter. Use NLQ for final drafts and important
documents where appearance matters.
You can also use your printer’s front panel or the menu to set the print quality, but settings
made using the front panel are likely to be overridden by software applications.
To select the NLQ print mode in the Epson emulation, you must send two commands: ESC x 1
and ESC k n. The ESC x 1 command must be sent to the printer first, followed by the ESC k n
command. Parameter n designates which font will be used as follows:
n=0: Courier NLQ
n=1: Sans Serif NLQ
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
29
Individual Print Mode & Font Commands for 24-Pin Printers (IBM/E)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select Utility Print Mode
Select LQ Print Mode
Select LQ Print Mode & Font
ASCII
ESC x 0
ESC x 1
ESC k n
Dec.
27 120 48
27 120 49
27 107 n
Hex.
1B 78 30
1B 78 31
1B 6B n
Use Utility printing for drafts and other documents that you want to print quickly.
Letter Quality (LQ) printing is slower than utility printing, but the characters are much crisper
and sharper. Use LQ for top-quality printing of final drafts and important documents, where
appearance matters.
You can also use your printer’s front panel or the menu to set the print quality, but settings
made using the front panel are likely to be overridden by software applications.
The ESC k n command allows you to select a specific font for the LQ mode. Substitute a value
for n from the table below.
Table 25: IBM/Epson ESC k Command —
Fonts for n Values
Hex. Value of n
00
01
02
03
04
07
7A
7C
7E
30
Font
Roman
Swiss
Courier
Prestige
Script
Orator
Swiss Bold
Gothic
Menu Setting
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
Combined Select Font Command (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select Print Quality and Character Spacing
ASCII
ESC I n
Decimal
27 73 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hexadecimal
1B 49 n
This command allows you to select print quality and character spacing for resident fonts for all
models listed. It also allows you to select print quality and character spacing for downline
loadable (DLL) fonts for all but Models ML390 Turbo and ML391 Turbo. Substitute a value for
n from the table below.
Table 26: IBM ESC I Command —
Print Modes Coresponding to n Values for All 9-Pin Models
Value of n
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11
15
Print mode
10 cpi utility
12 cpi HSD
NLQ Sans Serif
NLQ Courier
10 cpi DLL utility
12 cpi DLL utility
NLQ Sans Serif DLL
NLQ Courier DLL
NLQ Courier Italic*
NLQ Courier DLL Italic*
* ML320T, ML321T, ML520, ML521 only
Table 27: IBM IBM ESC I Command—
Print Modes for n Values for 24-Pin Models ML390T & ML391T
Dec. Value of n
0
2
3
8
10
16
18
24
26
32
34
Print Mode
10 cpi Utility
10 cpi LQ
Proportional LQ
12 cpi Utility
12 cpi LQ
17.1 cpi Utility
17.1 cpi LQ
15 cpi Utility
15 cpi LQ
20 cpi Utility
20 cpi LQ
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
31
Table 28: IBM ESC I Command —
Print Modes Coresponding to n Values for 24-Pin Models ML590 & ML591
Dec. Value of n
0
2
3
4
6
7
8
10
12
Print mode
10 cpi Utility Resident
10 cpi LQ Resident
Proportional LQ Resident
10 cpi Utility DLL
10 cpi LQ DLL
Proportional LQ DLL
12 cpi Utility Resident
12 cpi LQ Resident
12 cpi Utility DLL
Dec. Value of n
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
32
24
Print mode
12 cpi LQ DLL
17.1 cpi Utility Resident
17.1 cpi LQ Resident
17.1 cpi Utility DLL
17.1 cpi LQ DLL
15 cpi Utility Resident
15 cpi LQ Resident
20 cpi Utility
20 cpi Utility
Select Font Command (IBM)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select Typeface,
Character Pitch
and Spacing
ASCII
ESC [ l Ln Hn Hfid Lfid
Hfwd Lfwd fa
Decimal
27 91 108 Ln Hn Hfid
Lfid
Hfwd Lfwd fa
Hexadecimal
1B 5B 6C Ln Hn Hfid Lfid
Hfwd Lfwd fa
This command can be used to select a typeface, plus a character pitch or proportional spacing.
Parameters Ln and Hn
Parameters Ln and Hn are used to set which of the following parameters will be activated. The
value calculated by the equation
Ln + (Hn x 256)
is used to determine how the various parameters will be treated:
Table 29: IBM ESC [ l Command —
Parameter Activated for Calculated Ln, Hn Values
Value
0 or 1
2 or 3
4
5
6 or more
Parameters Activated
Command invalid
Fid valid; Fwd and fa unchanged
Fid and Fwd valid; fa unchanged
Fid, Fwd and fa valid
Fid, Fwd and fa valid; parameter
data dumped after 6 bytes
Parameters Hfid and Lfid
Parameters Hfid and Lfid are used to select the font to be used. The value determined from the
equation
(Hfid x 256) + Lfid
32
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
is used to select the font as follows:
Table 30: IBM ESC [ l Command —
Fonts Selected for Calcualted Hfid, Lfid Values
Font Selected
Invalid
Courier 10
Courier 10 Italic
Courier 10 Symbol
Courier 10/10 Shalom
Courier 12
Courier 12 Italic
Courier 12/12 Shalom
Courier 15
Courier 15/15 Shalom
Courier Proportional
Letter Gothic 12
Letter Gothic 15
Letter Gothic 17
OCR-A 10
OCR-B 10
Orator 10
Prestige Pica 10
Prestige Elite 12
Prestige Elite Symbol 12
Prestige Elite 12/12 Yasmin
Prestige 15
Prestige Proportional
Roman Bold Proportional
Roman Bold Italic Proportional
Roman Proportional/Proportional Barak
Roman Proportional/Proportional Yasmin
Script 12
Value
0
011
018
008
049
085
092
098
223
226
171
087
222
255
019
003
005
012
086
080
100
221
164
159
155
167
166
084
Parameters Hfwd and Lfwd
Parameters Hfwd and Lfwd are used to select a character pitch. The value determined from the
equation
[(Hfwd x 256) + Lfwd] x 1/1440"
is used to select the character pitch as follows:
Table 31: IBM ESC [ l Command —
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
33
Character Pitch Settings for Calculated Hfwd, Lfwd Values
Hex Value
00
90
78
60
54
48
Character Pitch
Command invalid
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi
17 cpi
20 cpi
The setting made using the Hfwd and Lfwd parameters will automatically be overridden if the fa
parameter is set to 02 hexadecimal.
Parameter fa
Parameter fa is used to engage proportional spacing.
fa = 02 hexadecimal (2 decimal): engage proportional spacing
fa = 00 hexadecimal (0 decimal):use character pitch set by parameters Hfwd and Lfwd.
Combined Print Mode Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Select Print Features
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
ASCII
ESC ! n
Decimal
27 33 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hexadecimal
1B 21 n
This command lets you use any combination of the features listed in the table below. The value
of n can range from 0 to 255. To determine the value of n, add up the values for all the features
you wish to use. To turn off all these features and return to 10 cpi printing, substitute 0 for n.
34
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
Table 32: Epson ESC ! Command —
Print Features for n Values
Feature
Compressed printing
Double width printing
12 cpi (Elite) printing
Emphasized printing
Enhanced printing
Italics printing
Proportional printing
Underline printing
Value
4
32
1
8
16
64
2
128
For example, to print underlined italics at 12 cpi, assign n the value of 193 (128 + 64 + 1).
Each time you send this command, it sets or cancels the values for all nine of the features it
controls (the eight features listed in the table, plus 10 cpi). This means that if you've requested
12 cpi underline italics, and then want to add emphasized printing to these features, you must
add 8 to 193 and resend the command as ESC ! 210. If you send the command ESC ! 8, it will
turn off all the other features as it turns on emphasized print.
To see the range of print styles you can produce with the ESC ! n command, run the following
BASIC program which prints a sample of each possible combination. Please note that since the
program prints all 256 combinations, it will take a few minutes and about 12 pages for the
entire sample to print.
10 FOR I = 0 TO 255
20 LPRINT:LPRINT
30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"!";CHR$(I);"ESC !";I;" selects this combination."
40 NEXT I
Italics Print Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Italics Printing On
Italics Printing Off
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
IBM
ASCII: ESC % G
Dec: 27 37 71
Hex: 1B 25 47
ASCII: ESC % H
Dec: 27 37 72
Hex: 1B 25 48
Epson
ASCII: ESC 4
Dec: 27 52
Hex: 1B 34
ASCII: ESC 5
Dec: 27 53
Hex: 1B 35
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
ML
ASCII: ESC ! /
Dec: 27 33 47
Hex: 1B 21 2F
ASCII: ESC ! *
Dec: 27 33 42
Hex: 1B 21 2A
Italics printing is slanted, like this, and is used to lend emphasis to phrases, sentences, or entire
paragraphs.
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
35
If you intend to print an entire document in italics, you can use the printer menu to select
italics. You will find italics in the menu under the group “Font” and the setting “Style.” See
“Menu Mode” in your printer manual for more information on making changes in the menu
settings.
Emphasized & Enhanced Print Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Emphasized Printing On
Emphasized Printing Off
Enhanced Printing On
Enhanced Printing Off
IBM
ASCII: ESC E
Dec: 27 69
Hex: 1B 45
ASCII: ESC F
Dec: 27 70
Hex: 1B 46
ASCII: ESC G
Dec: 27 71
Hex: 1B 47
ASCII: ESC H
Dec: 27 72
Hex: 1B 48
Epson
ASCII: ESC E
Dec: 27 69
Hex: 1B 45
ASCII: ESC F
Dec: 27 70
Hex: 1B 46
ASCII: ESC G
Dec: 27 71
Hex: 1B 47
ASCII: ESC H
Dec: 27 72
Hex: 1B 48
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
ML
ASCII: ESC T
Dec: 27 84
Hex: 1B 54
ASCII: ESC I
Dec: 27 73
Hex: 1B 49
ASCII: ESC H
Dec: 27 72
Hex: 1B 48
ASCII: ESC I
Dec: 27 73
Hex: 1B 49
Your printer produces bold type by printing each dot of a character twice instead of once. In
emphasized printing, the pairs of dots are offset horizontally. In enhances printing, the pairs of
dots are offset vertically.
You can combine emphasized and enhanced printing for an especially bold effect. For
headlines, try using them in combination with double width characters; you can also combine
emphasized printing with double height characters.
Underline/Overscore/Strike-Through Commands
Underline Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Underline Printing On
Underline Printing Off
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
IBM
ASCII: ESC - 1
Dec: 27 45 49
Hex: 1B 2D 31
ASCII: ESC - 0
Dec: 27 45 48
Hex: 1B 2D 30
Epson
ASCII: ESC - 1
Dec: 27 45 49
Hex: 1B 2D 31
ASCII: ESC - 0
Dec: 27 45 48
Hex: 1B 2D 30
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
ML
ASCII: ESC C
Dec: 27 67
Hex: 1B 43
ASCII: ESC D
Dec: 27 68
Hex: 1B 44
The underline feature underscores all characters, including the space character, but does not
underscore graphics or the space produced by any horizontal positioning command such as
horizontal tab.
In the Epson emulation, you can also use the Combined Print Mode (ESC ! n) command to
engage underlining.
36
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
Overscore Commands (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Overscore Printing On
Overscore Printing Off
ASCII
ESC _ 1
ESC _ 0
Dec
27 95 1
27 95 0
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 5F 01
1B 5F 00
The overscore feature prints a continuous line over all characters, including the space
character, but does not overscore the space produced by a horizontal tab command. This
feature is available only in the IBM emulation.
Score Style Command (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select Score Style
ASCII
ESC ( - Ln Hn
Pn D1 D2
Decimal
27 40 45 Ln Hn
Pn D1 D2
Hexadecimal
1B 28 2D Ln Hn
Pn D1 D2
This command lets you set underline, strike-through and overscore styles: continuous, dashed,
single or double lines.
Parameter Pn
Parameter Pn is set to 01 hex (1 dec, SOH ASCII).
Parameters Ln and Hn
Parameters Ln and Hn designate the quantity of data to be scored, according to the following
equation:
Ln + (Hn x 256)
If Ln and Hn are less than 3, the designated data will be dumped.
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
37
Parameters D1 and D2
Parameter D1 is used to set the type of score and parameter D2 is used to set the attributes, as
indicated in the table.
Table 33: Epson ESC ( - Command —
Score Styles for D1 and D2 Values
D1
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
D2
1
1
1
2
2
2
5
5
5
6
6
6
Score Style
Continuous, single underline
Continuous, single strike-through
Continuous, single overscore
Continuous, double underline
Continuous, double strike-through
Continuous, double overscore
Dashed, single underline
Dashed, single strike-through
Dashed, single overscore
Dashed, double underline
Dashed, double strike-through
Dashed, double overscore
Using a value of 0 for D2 will cancel the score mode.
Note: Scores can only be used for printing characters: they can't be used to print line graphics
Outline/Shadow Commands (IBM/E)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Outline Printing On
Shadow Printing On
Outline and Shadow Printing On
Outline and/or Shadow Printing Off
ASCII
ESC q 1
ESC q 2
ESC q 3
ESC q 0
Dec
27 113 49
27 113 50
27 113 51
27 113 48
Hex
1B 71 31
1B 71 32
1B 71 33
1B 71 30
The outline feature prints characters as outlines with hollow center. The shadow feature prints
characters with a shadow behind them. Combining the features produces outline characters
with a shadow behind them. These features can be used to produce more interesting and stylish
headings. They can be combined with emphaiszed and/or enhanced printing, double width,
etc., for an even more striking effect.
Note: Outline and shadow can only be used for printing characters: they can't be used to
print line graphics.
38
Chapter 4: Character Style Commands
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
Your printer's custom (down line loadable) character feature enables you to design your own
characters and symbols, even entire character sets if you choose, and download them from
your computer to the printer. You can design and store multiple characters. The actual
designing of these characters requires some work on your part and can become tedious. We
strongly recommend using a commercial software package to help you create new characters
and download them to your printer. There are also packages that provide character sets that
have already been designed for you.
This chapter describes the custom character commands for your printer, including
• ROM to RAM Copy Commands
• Down Line Loading Commands
• Custom Character Set Commands
• Select DLL Font Commands
The chapter is divided into two sections: one for the 9-pin printers and one for the 24-pin
printers.
Custom Character Commands: 9-Pin Printers
Designing a Custom Character for 9-Pin Printers
The technique of designing your own custom characters is much like that of designing a
graphic image, but on a much smaller scale. You can design characters in either Utility or Near
Letter Quality mode: simply activate the desired mode before you download the characters.
Begin by designing your character on a grid. The height of the grid for a normal character is 7
dots, each corresponding to a pin on the printer's printhead. The width of the grid usable for a
character is a maximum of 11 dots (the twelfth dot in the grid width is reserved as blank).
The 7-dot grid can be adjusted up or down several dot positions by using the attribute byte in
the print command. This byte specifies whether the character is an ascender (top 7 rows) or a
descender (bottom 7 rows). The attribute byte also contains other information about the
character, as explained later.
The character's baseline lies below the seventh dot from the top if it is an ascender, or below
the sixth dot from the top if it is a descender. The columns of the matrix to the left and right of
your character affect where it will appear in relation to the characters on either side of it. There
is one mandatory blank column at the end of the character (column 12). If you don't leave
blank columns, adjacent characters may appear to run right into your character.
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
39
Your arrangement of dots is translated into code that tells your printer the exact location of
each dot within each column. The example which follows illustrates how this works.
This character is 9 dots wide and is flush to the left. We'll print it in 10 cpi utility mode. Just
like 8-pin graphics, each byte specifies a dot column, and the value of each byte is determined
by adding up the values of its bits.
Note: In all print modes, you cannot place two dots next to each other horizontally—you
must skip one column.
Now we need to give the commands that download this data to the printer.
IBM Custom Character Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Copy ROM to RAM Command for 9-Pin Printers (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Copy ROM Character Set to RAM Character Set
ASCII
ESC $
Dec
27 36
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 24
This command copies a complete set of the characters resident in the printer to the area of its
memory reserved for custom characters. The new character will become part of this character
set. This makes it possible to mix standard characters with your custom characters when you
print.
40
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
Down Line Load Characters Command for 9-Pin Printers (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Down Line Load Characters
ASCII
ESC = c1 c2 m n
a1 a2 [data]
⻬ ML520, ML521
Decimal
27 61 c1 c2 m n
a1 a2 [data]
Hexadecimal
1B 3D c1 c2 m n
a1 a2 [data]
Use this command with the ML520 or the ML521 printer to begin downloading the characters.
Parameters c1 and c2
These parameters specify the total count of characters to be downloaded. How these variables
are calculated depends on which mode is engaged: Utility printing or Near Letter Quality
(NLQ) printing.
For Utility printing:
value = (# of characters to be changed x 13) + 2
For NLQ printing:
value = (# of characters to be changed x 48) + 2
If the value obtained is less than 256, substitute the value for c1 and replace c2 with 0.
If the value obtained is 256 or more, divide the value by 256. Replace c2 with the whole
number result and assign the remainder to c1.
Parameter m
This parameter selects the print quality:
m = 20: Utility printing
m = 21: NLQ printing
Parameter n
This parameter specifies the ASCII value of the starting character in the set to be redefined
(characters must be redefined in sequence) and can be assigned any value in the range 0 to
255.
Parameters a1 and a2
These parameters designate the attributes of the character.
Parameter a1
Parameter a1 denotes whether the character is an ascender or descender:
a1 = 0: ascender
a1 = 128: descender
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
41
Here is a breakdown of the definitions for the various bit values for a1:
Bit b7:
b7 = 0: ascender
b7 = 1: descender
Note: If b0 or b1 is 0, b7 is ignored.
Bits b6, b5, b4, b3, b2: ignored
Bits b1 and b0:
b1, b0 = 0, 0: No expansion to 12 dots high: b7 valid
b1, b0 = 0, 1: Selects line draw characters; data is expanded to a total height of 12
dots in two passes: b7 ignored.
b1, b0 = 1, 0: Shaded character; data is expanded to a total height of 12 dots in two
passes: b7 ignored.
b1, b0 = 1, 1: NUL is expanded to a total height of 12 dots in two passes: b7 ignored.
Parameter a2
Parameter a2 denotes the total width of the character in dots.
Table 34: IBM ESC = Command —
Character Widths for a2Values
a2 (Decimal)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Character Width, in Dots
Ignored
1 column wide
2 columns wide
3 columns wide
4 columns wide
5 columns wide
6 columns wide
7 columns wide
8 columns wide
9 columns wide
10 columns wide
11 columns wide
End the command with the data for the character calculated from your grid. If you're
downloading several characters, you only need one ESC & NUL command, and you only need
to include m and n once, but you must include a value for parameter a in each set of character
data.
42
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
Epson Custom Character Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Copy ROM to RAM Command for 9-Pin Printers (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Copy ROM Character Set
to RAM Character Set
ASCII
ESC : NUL NUL NUL
Dec
27 58 0 0 0
Hex
1B 3A 00 00 00
This command is used with the ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I, ML320T, or ML321T printer to copy a
complete set of the characters resident in the printer to the area of its memory reserved for
custom characters. The new character will become part of this character set.
⻬ ML520, ML521
Function
Copy ROM Character Set
to RAM Character Set
ASCII
ESC : NUL n NUL
Dec
27 58 0 n 0
Hex
1B 3A 0 n 0
This command is used with the ML520 or ML521 printer to copy a complete set of the
characters resident in the printer to the area of its memory reserved for custom characters. The
new character will become part of this character set. This makes it possible to mix standard
characters with your custom characters when you print.
Parameter n is used to specify the NLQ font to be used:
n = 0: NLQ Courier
n = 1: NLQ Sans Serif
Down Line Load Characters Command for 9-Pin Printers (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Down Line Load
Characters
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC & NUL n1 n2 a
[data]
Dec
27 38 0 n1 n2 a
[data]
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 26 00 n1 n2 a
[data]
Use this command to begin downloading the character(s).
Parameters n1 n2
These parameters specify the range of characters to be replaced with new ones. Multiple
characters must be assigned to adjacent locations. Parameter n1 indicates the first character that
will be replaced; parameter n2 indicates the last character that will be replaced.
Custom characters can normally be assigned to decimal locations 32 to 126 and 160 to 255. If
IBM Character Set II is selected (ESC 6 command), characters can also be assigned to locations
128 to 159.
Parameter a
This parameter indicates how the character will be positioned within its grid as follows:
Ascenders: a is calculated as
last dot column of character + (first dot column x 16) + 128
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
43
Descenders: a is calculated as
last dot column of character + (first dot column x 16)
Parameter a can be assigned any value in the range 0 to 255.
End the command with the data for the character calculated from your grid.
If you're downloading several characters, you only need one ESC & NUL command, and you
only need to include n1 and n2 once, but you must include a value for parameter a in each set
of character data.
Custom Character Set On/Off Commands for 9-Pin Printers (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Select Standard Character Set
Select Custom Character Set
ASCII
ESC % 0
ESC % 1
Dec
27 37 48
27 37 49
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 25 30
1B 25 31
To switch from the standard character set to the custom character set, use the ESC % 1
command.
To switch back to the standard character set, use the ESC % 0 command. Otherwise, the
custom character set will remain in the printer's memory until one of the following happens:
you turn off the printer
you reset the printer with the ESC @ command
you overwrite them with new custom characters
you use the ESC : NUL NUL NUL command to overwrite them with the standard character set.
44
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
Okidata MICROLINE Standard Custom Character Commands
for 9-Pin Printers
Copy ROM to RAM Command for 9-Pin Printers (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Copy ROM Character Set to RAM Character Set
ASCII
ESC $
⻬ ML520, ML521
Dec
27 36
Hex
1B 24
This command copies a complete set of the characters resident in the printer to the area of its
memory reserved for custom characters. The new character will become part of this character
set. This makes it possible to mix standard characters with your custom characters when you go
to print.
Down Line Load Characters Commands for 9-Pin Printers (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Down Line Load
Ascender Characters
Down Line Load
Descender Characters
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
ASCII
ESC % A m n1 ... n11
Dec
27 37 65 m n1 ... n11
Hex
1B 25 41 m n1 ... n11
ESC % D m n1 ... n11
27 37 68 m n1 ... n11
1B 25 44 m n1 ... n11
To begin downloading an ascender character, use the ESC % A m n1 ... n11 command. This
command specifies that the new character will be an ascender.
To begin downloading a descender character, use the ESC % D m n1 ... n11 command. This
command specifies that the new character will be a descender.
Parameter m
This parameter specifies the character that will be replaced by the custom character. Custom
characters can be assigned to decimal locations 32 to 127 and 160 to 223.
Data n1 through n11
n1 through n11 specify the data for the character, calculated from your grid.
Select DLL Font Commands for 9-Pin Printers (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Select DLL in Utility Mode
Select DLL in Near Letter Quality Mode
ASCII
ESC 2
ESC 7
Dec
27 50
27 55
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 32
1B 37
The ESC 2 command switches custom character printing on when the printer is set for the
Utility mode.
The ESC 7 command switches custom character printing on when the printer is set for the Near
Letter Quality (NLQ) print mode. NLQ custom characters are just like Utility custom characters,
except that overprinting is used to make them match the NLQ character set.
Once you have selected the Custom Character Set, it will remain in memory until the printer is
turned off. Any one of the following will also delete the Custom Character Set from the printer's
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
45
memory:
•
you reset the printer with the ESC CAN command
•
you overwrite them with new custom characters
•
you use the ESC $ command to overwrite them with the Standard Character Set.
Custom Character Commands: 24-Pin Printers
Designing a Custom Character for 24-Pin Printers
The technique for designing your own custom characters is much like that of designing a
graphic image, but on a much smaller scale. You can design characters in either Utility or LQ
mode: simply activate the desired mode before you download the characters.
Begin by designing your character on a grid. The height of the grid is 24 dots, each
corresponding to a pin on the printhead. The width of the grid, as well as the width of the
character itself, depends on the print mode.
Table 35: Custom Character Commands —
Character/Grid Width for Print Modes (24-Pin Printers)
d0 = space to the left of the character
d1 = width of the character itself
d2 = space to the right of the character
Print Mode
Utility
LQ
Proportional
Max. Character Width (d1)
15 dots
37 dots
37 dots
Max. Total Grid Width (d0 + d1 + d2)
18 dots
42 dost
42 dots
Note: If the printer is in superscript or subscript mode, only the first two or last two bytes are
needed for each column.
Characters are designed on a grid made up of columns of 24 dots. Each column, in turn, is
divided into three 8-dot groups, and each 8-dot group is represented by a byte of data.
When designing a character, keep the intended use for the character in mind. If the character is
to be included with text, leave the top and bottom two rows of the grid blank, in keeping with
general font design standards. The character's baseline occurs at the sixth dot from the bottom.
The columns of the grid to the left and right of your character affect where it will appear in
relation to the characters on either side. If you don't leave blank columns, adjacent characters
may appear to run right into your custom character.
46
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
Your arrangement of dots is translated into code that tells the printer the exact locations of each
dot in each column. The example below shows how this works.
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
•• • • •
••
••
••
••
••
•• • • • • • • • •
••
••
•
•• • • • • • • •
•
•
••
•
•
••
•
•• • • •
•
The width of the grid in dots depends on the printing mode in use. This example character is 27
dots wide and has 4 blank columns on either side. We'll print it in 10 cpi Letter Quality. Since
the character is being printed in 24-pin mode, three bytes of data are required to specify a
single column. Just like high resolution 24-pin graphics, the first three bytes specify dot
positions for the second column, and so on up to the last column in which dots will appear.
The value of each byte is determined by adding up the values of its bits.
Note: In all print modes, you can NOT place two dots next ot each other horizontally—you
must skip one column.
The commands below are used to download this data to the printer.
IBM Custom Character Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Down Line Load Characters Command (IBM)
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Download Custom
Character
ASCII
ESC = n1 n2 # a1 a2 a3
m ad1 ad2 id1 id2 d1 d2
d3 d4 d5 [data]
Dec
27 61 n1 n2 35 a1 a2 a3
m ad1 ad2 id1 id2 d1 d2
d3 d4 d5 [data]
Hex
1B 3D n1 n2 23 a1 a2
a3 m ad1 ad2 id1 id2 d1
d2 d3 d4 d5 [data]
Parameters n1 n2
These parameters specify the number of bytes in the command string. The total number of bytes
is calculated as follows:
No. of bytes = n1 + (n2 x 256)
Parameters a1 a2 a3
Parameters a1 and a2 specify the starting address of the custom character data, calculated as
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
47
follows:
starting address = a1 + (a2 x 256)
Parameter a3 indicates the number of characters to be down loaded.
Note: If fewer than 256 characters are loaded, all character codes must be consecutive from
the starting point.
Parameter m
The bits of this parameter determine the character pitch and print mode as follows:
b0: always 0
b1: ignored
b2, b3 = 0, 0: Utility, all pitches
0, 1: LQ, 10 cpi
1, 0: LQ, 12 cpi
1, 1: LQ, proportional
b6 = 0: Last data table
1: Another data table follows
Note: The command up to parameter m need only be included once for each down loading
sequence. The following parameters apply to the specific characters, and must be
included for each individual character in the sequence.
Parameters ad1 ad2
These parameters specify the starting address of the character, as follows:
character address = ad1 + (ad2 x 256)
Parameter id1
Here is a breakdown of the bit values for id1:
b0 to b5 = Number of columns to be loaded (1 to 63)
b6 = 0: Load to RAM
1: Copied from ROM character generator
b7 = 0: Normal character
1: Elongated character
Parameter id2
Here is a breakdown of the bit values for id2:
b0 to b5 = Character width (1 to 63, proportional)
b6, b7 = 0, 0: Data for pins 19 to 24 copied to pins 25 to 30
0, 1: Data for pins 23, 24, duplicated for pins 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30
1, 0: Underline
1, 1: No elongation
Parameters d1 d2 d3 d4 d5
Each bit of the parameter bytes indicates whether the data in the specified column is identical
to the previous column or is new.
bit = 0: data is new
48
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
bit = 1: data is a repeat of previous column
The parameters specify data repetition as follows:
d1: columns 1 to 8
d2: columns 9 to 16
d3: columns 17 to 24
d4: columns 25 to 32
d5: columns 33 to 40
Epson Custom Character Commands for 24-Pin Printers
First use the Copy ROM to RAM command to copy a complete set of the characters resident in
the printer ot the area of its memory reserved for custom characters. The new character you
designed will become part of this character set.
To begin downloading the custom character, use the Download Custom Characters Command
to specify the range of characters that you will be replacing with new ones, to indicate how
you have positioned the character within its grid, and to supply the data for the character(s),
calculated from your grid(s).
To switch between the standard character set and your custom character set, use the Custom
Character Set On/Off Command.
Copy ROM to RAM Command for 24-Pin Printers (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo ⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Copy ROM Character Set
to RAM Character Set
ASCII
ESC : NUL n NUL
Dec
27 58 0 n 0
Hex
1B 3A 00 n 00
This command is used to copy a complete set of the characters resident in the printer to the
area of its memory reserved for custom characters. The new character will become part of this
character set.
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
49
Parameter n
Parameter n is used to specify the font to be used.
Table 36: Epson ESC : Command — Fonts for n Values
Value of n
0
1
2
3
4
5
Font
Roman
Swiss
Courier (default)
Prestige
Script
OCR-B
Value of n
6
7
8
122
124
126
Font
OCR-A
Orator
Orator-S
Swiss Bold
Letter Gothic
Font set on Menu
Down Line Load Characters Commands for 24-Pin Printers (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Load Custom Characters
ASCII
ESC & m n1 n2
d0 d1 d2 [data]
Dec
27 38 m n1 n2
d0 d1 d2 [data]
Hex
1B 26 m n1 n2
d0 d1 d2 [data]
ASCII
ESC & NUL m n1 n2
d0 d1 d2 [data]
Dec
27 38 0 m n1 n2
d0 d1 d2 [data]
Hex
1B 26 00 m n1 n2
d0 d1 d2 [data]
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Load Custom Characters
Use these commands to begin downloading the character(s) to the printer.
Parameter m
This parameter selects the available area in RAM. The only available values/locations are m = 0
or m = 128.
Parameters n1 n2
These parameters specify the range of characters to be replaced with new ones. Multiple
characters must be assigned to adjacent locations.
Parameter n1 indicates the first character that will be replaced: range 0 to 127.
Parameter n2 indicates the last character that will be replaced: range 1 to 127.
Parameters d0 d1 d2
These parameters define the width of the character grid in dots as follows:
d0 = width of space before the character
d1 = width of the character
d2 = width of space after the character
Follow these parameters with the data calculated from your grid as shown above in the section
“Designing a Custom Character for 24-Pin Printers.”
50
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
Custom Character Set On/Off Command for 24-Pin Printers (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo ⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Select Standard Character Set
Select Custom Character Set
ASCII
ESC % 0
ESC % 1
Dec
27 37 0
27 37 1
Hex
1B 25 00
1B 25 01
To switch from the standard character set to the custom character set, use the ESC % 1
command.
To switch back to the standard character set, use the ESC % 0 command. Otherwise, the
custom character set will remain in the printer's memory until one of the following happens:
•
you turn off the printer
•
you reset the printer with the ESC @ command
•
you overwrite them with new custom characters
•
you use the ESC : NUL NUL NUL command to overwrite them with the standard character
set.
Load Custom Character Set into Upper ASCII Command for 24-Pin Printers (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo ⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Select Custom Character Set
ASCII
ESC t 2
Dec
27 116 2
Hex
1B 74 02
This command loads the custom character set (decimal 0 to 127) into the upper ASCII range
(128 to 255).
Chapter 5: Custom Character Commands
51
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Overview
Your printhead has one column of pins. Images are created as the pins “fire,” striking the
ribbon against the paper to produce dots. White spaces appear where the pins don't fire. In 8pin graphics, each column of dots is represented by a single byte of data. Models ML320,
ML321, ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo, ML520, and ML521 use the 9-pin mode in cases where a
slightly higher resolution is required: it uses two bytes to represent each dot column.
When you program a graphic image, your program has to describe the pattern of dots you want
to print. Graphics data, like all other data sent to the printer, consists of a series of bytes. Each
of the eight bits in a byte of graphics data corresponds to one pin on the printhead. A bit's
value can be either 1 or 0. When the printer receives the data, it interprets a bit with a value of
1 as a command to fire the corresponding pin. Bits that are set to 0 don't cause pins to fire.
You can picture the byte as a column of 8 bits. In 8-pin graphics, the body of data is a series of
these columns lined up next to each other. Instead of sending the data to the printer bit by bit,
you'll probably want to convert this binary information into decimal or hexadecimal format for
use with your programming language. In the figure below we show how to determine the
decimal value for a given pattern of pins.
For optimum registration when printing graphics using bi-directional printing, use the Print
Registration item in the printer menu to fine-tune the alignment of the vertical bars which print
as part of the menu. Keep changing the setting until the lines of the vertical bar characters have
the straightest vertical column.
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers
53
Programming Graphics in BASIC
One important thing to remember when you're programming graphics is not to include
extraneous line feeds in your programs. Using a semicolon after the data in an LPRINT
statement will keep the print position on the same line.
However, there is an additional complication: by default, BASIC assigns to all printers a
maximum line length of 80 characters. After the printer has received 80 bytes of data, it will
automatically perform a carriage return and line feed. Since graphics data typically consists of
many bytes, it's quite easy to exceed this limit. The resulting output will be garbled. You can
work around this problem by setting the line length to the maximum allowable value, 255. Put
one of these statements at the beginning of your program:
For parallel printers:
WIDTH “LPT1:”,255
For serial printers that have been opened as #1:
WIDTH #1,255
Graphics Density Selection Commands (IBM/E)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Begin Single Density
Graphics
Double Density
Graphics Command
Double Speed/
Double Density
Graphics Command
Quadruple Density
Graphics Command
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
ASCII
ESC K Ln Hn [data]
Dec
27 75 Ln Hn [data]
Hex
1B 4B Ln Hn [data]
ESC L Ln Hn [data]
27 76 Ln Hn [data]
1B 4C Ln Hn [data]
ESC Y Ln Hn [data]
27 89 Ln Hn [data]
1B 59 Ln Hn [data]
ESC Z Ln Hn [data]
27 90 Ln Hn [data]
1B 5A Ln Hn [data]
These graphics modes correspond to the 8-pin modes and are supported by most current
DOS-based graphics software.
Parameters Ln and Hn
These parameters tell the printer how many bytes of graphics data to expect. Eight-pin graphics
have one byte of data per column. To calculate the values for Ln and Hn, first determine how
many columns of dots there will be in your graphics image. Divide this number by 256 and
assign the whole number result to Hn; assign the remainder to Ln.
54
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Graphics Density Selection Commands (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Select Single Density Graphics
Select Double Density Graphics
Select Double Speed &
Quadruple Density Graphics
ASCII
ESC P
or ESC Q
ESC R
ESC # Q
Dec
27 80
or 27 81
27 82
27 35 81
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 50
or 1B 51
1B 52
1B 23 51
Use these commands to select the density of the printing that will be used: single density (60
dpi), double density (120 dpi), or quadruple density (240 dpi). The quadruple density selection
command also engages double speed.
Graphics Select/Print Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Graphics Select/Print
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC * m Ln Hn [data]
⻬ ML520, ML521
Dec
27 42 m Ln Hn
[data]
Hex
1B 2A m Ln Hn [data]
This command is used to select the density, to designate the number of columns of data you'll
be sending, and to specify the data to be sent.
Parameter m
This parameter specifies which density to use when printing the graphic image. The table
below indicates the type of density for each value of m.
Table 37: Epson ESC * m Command —
8-Pin Graphics Density Codes for m Values (9-Pin Printers)
Value of m
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Graphics Type
Single Density
Double Density
High Speed Double Density
Quadruple Density
CRT I
Plotter (Single Density)
CRT II
Double Density Plotter
Horizontal Density (dots per inch)
60 dpi
120 dpi
120 dpi
240 dpi
80 dpi
72 dpi
90 dpi
144 dpi
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers
55
Once you've selected the density you want to use, you have to design your graphic image.
Begin by mapping out the pattern you want to print on a piece of graph paper. Here is a sample
pattern for a triangle:
Parameters Ln and Hn
These parameters tell the printer how many columns of data you'll be sending: 8-pin modes
have one byte of data per column. To calculate the values, first determine how many columns
of dots there will be in your graphics image. Divide this number by 256 and assign the whole
number to Hn; assign the remainder to Ln.
In our triangle example, each triangle requires 16 columns. We'll be printing a row of 6
triangles, so the total number of columns in the image is 6 x 16, or 96. Dividing 96 by 256
gives a value of 0 for Hn with a remainder of 96, which we'll assign to Ln.
Next, we can write a BASIC statement that sends the command begin 8-pin graphics:
LPRINT CHR$(27);”*”;CHR$(3);CHR$(96);CHR$(0);
Note: Be sure to include the semicolon(;) at the end of this statement. That way, the printer
won't insert a carriage return and line feed before your graphics data.
The listing below is a BASIC program for the Epson emulation that will generate a row of six of
our triangles in quadruple density. To print the pattern at another density, change the value of
D in line 10 to one of the other density codes.
10 D=3 ‘Density code for quadruple density (Epson)
20 WIDTH “LPT1:”,255 ‘Set printer for maximum line width
30 LPRINT CHR$(27);”*”;CHR$(D);CHR$(96);CHR$(0);
40 REM CHR$(D) is the density; in this case D=3 for quadruple density
50 REM CHR$(96) and CHR$(0) indicate the number of columns
60 FOR I=1 TO 6 ‘Repeat triangle pattern six times
70 FOR J=1 TO 16 ‘Each triangle has 16 columns
80 READ A ‘Read the column
90 LPRINT CHR$(A); ‘Send the byte to the printer
100 NEXT J ‘Now print the next column
110 RESTORE ‘Go back to the beginning of the DATA statements
120 NEXT I ‘Now print the next triangle
130 END
140 DATA 1,3,7,15,31,63,127,255,255,127,63,31,15,7,3,1
Your printout will look like this:
䊱䊱䊱䊱䊱䊱
56
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Reassign Graphics Codes Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Reassign Graphics
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC ? m n
Dec
27 63 m n
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 3F m n
You can use this command to reassign any of the 8-pin graphics modes to one of the graphics
commands (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or ESC Z).
Parameter m
This parameter designates which of the four commands you're redefining. Substitute one of the
four letters (K, L, Y, or Z) for m in the command.
Parameter n
This parameter designates the density of the mode you are reassigning to the redefined code.
Substitute the appropriate value (0 through 7) for the density you wish to select, as taken from
the 8-Pin Graphics Density Codes table earlier in this chapter.
When you are ready to print a graphics pattern, send the redefined command, followed by the
graphics data.
For example, the following BASIC statement reassigns quadruple density to the command ESC
L:
LPRINT CHR$(27);”?”;”L”;CHR$(3)
Select Graphics Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Select 9-pin Graphics
Printing
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC ^ m Ln Hn
[data]
Dec
27 94 m Ln Hn
[data]
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 5E m Ln Hn
[data]
This command permits use of all nine pins on the printhead. It operates exactly like the ESC *
command, except that dot columns are given two bytes each instead of one. The first byte for
each column represents the top eight pins, just like the ESC * command. The second byte is
128 if the bottom (9th) pin is to be fired, and zero if it's not to be fired.
Select Graphics Mode Command (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Select Graphics Mode
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC * n1 n2 :
Dec
27 42 n1 n2 58
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 2A n1 n2
3A
Use this command to select the density and to define the speed and “word size.”
Parameter n1
This parameter specifies the density. To calculate the value of n1, first select the dpi and density
you want, then determine the n1 values for each from the table below. Add them together, then
add 96 to the total.
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers
57
Table 38: ML ESC * Command —
Densities for n1 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Dots per inch/Density
60 dpi
72 dpi
Single density
Double density
Quadruple density
Value of n1
1
2
4
8
16
For example, for 60 dpi printing at quadruple density, the value of n1 would be calculated as
follows:
n1 = 1 + 16 + 96 = 113
Parameter n2
This parameter specifies the speed of the printing and a word length of 8 bits. To calculate the
value of n2, first select the speed and determine the value of n2 for that speed from the table
below. Next, select 7 or 8-bit graphics and determine the value of n2 for that word size from the
table. Add each of these two values together, then add 64 to the total.
Table 39: ML ESC * Command —
Speed & Word Sizes for n2 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Speed/Word Size
Normal speed
Double speed
7-bit graphics
8-bit graphics
Value n2
0
8
0
16
For example, for double speed, 8-bit graphics, the value of n2 would be calculated as follows:
n2 = 8 + 16 + 64 = 80
58
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Graphics Print Mode Commands (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Select Graphics Print Mode
End Graphics Print Mode
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ETX
ETX STX
Dec
3
32
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
03
03 02
To begin printing graphics, you must first send the ETX command. This is followed by graphics
data—bytes representing the individual dot columns you will be printing. The graphics data is
followed by the ETX STX command which ends graphics printing. The listing below is a BASIC
program that generates a row of six triangles in quadruple density.
10 WIDTH “LPT1:,”255 ‘Set printer for maximum line width
20 LPRINT CHR$(27);”*”;CHR$(113);CHR$(80);”:”;CHR$(3);
30 REM CHR$(113) and CHR$(80) are the attribute codes for normal speed,
quadruple density graphics
40 REM CHR$(3) Begins graphics printing
50 FOR I=1 TO 6 ‘Repeat triangle pattern six times
60 FOR J=1 TO 16 ‘Each triangle has 16 columns
70 READ A ‘Read the column
80 LPRINT CHR$(A); ‘Send the byte to the printer
90 NEXT J ‘Now print the next column
100 RESTORE ‘Go back to the beginning of the DATA statements
110 NEXT I ‘Now print the next triangle
120 LPRINT CHR$(3);CHR$(2); ‘End graphics printing
130 END
140 DATA 128,192,224,240,248,252,254,255,255,254,252,248,240,224,192,128
Your printout will look like this:
䊱䊱䊱䊱䊱䊱
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers
59
Special Purpose Line Feed Commands (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
If you are printing more than one line of graphics, you will need to use line feeds. In the
Okidata MICROLINE Standard emulation, your printer has a variety of special purpose line feed
commands for use in graphics printing:
Function
Graphics line feed
with carriage return
Graphics line feed
with carriage return
Graphics line feed
without carriage return
Graphics line feed
without carriage return
Stores graphics data
in one dot column buffer
Setting
Text
ASCII
ETX LF
Dec
3 10
Hex
03 0A
Graphics
ETX SO
3 14
03 0E
Text
ETX DC2
3 18
03 12
Graphics
ETX DC4
3 20
03 14
N/A
ETX ETX
33
03 03
The graphics setting is determined by whether you are using 7 or 8-bit graphics. In 7-bit
graphics mode, the graphics setting is 14/144”; in 8-bit graphics mode, it is 16/144”.
The text setting is determined by the current text line spacing, as set by the ESC 6 and ESC 8
commands.
60
Chapter 6: Graphics Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Overview
Your printhead has one column of pins. Images are created as the pins “fire,” striking the
ribbon against the paper to produce dots. White spaces appear where the pins don't fire. In 8pin graphics, each column of dots is represented by a single byte of data. In the Epson LQ
mode, Models ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo, ML590 and ML591 support 24-pin graphics, in
which each dot column is represented by three bytes of data.
When you program a graphic image, your program has to describe the pattern of dots you want
to print. Graphics data, like all other data sent to the printer, consists of a series of bytes. Each
of the eight bits in a byte of graphics data corresponds to one pin on the printhead. A bit's
value can be either 1 or 0. When the printer receives the data, it interprets a bit with a value of
1 as a command to fire the corresponding pin. Bits that are set to 0 don't cause pins to fire.
You can picture the byte as a column of 8 bits. In 8-pin graphics, the body of data is a series of
these columns lined up next to each other. Instead of sending the data to the printer bit by bit,
you'll probably want to convert this binary information into decimal or hexadecimal format for
use with your programming language. In the figure below we show how to determine the
decimal value for a given pattern of pins. For 24-pin graphics, you must perform this process a
total of three times.
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers
61
For optimum registration when printing graphics using bi-directional printing, use the Print
Registration item in the printer menu to fine-tune the alignment of the vertical bars which print
as part of the menu. Keep changing the setting until the lines of the vertical bar characters have
the straightest vertical column.
Programming Graphics in BASIC
One important thing to remember when you're programming graphics is not to include
extraneous line feeds in your programs. Using a semicolon after the data in an LPRINT
statement will keep the print position on the same line.
However, there is an additional complication: by default, BASIC assigns to all printers a
maximum line length of 80 characters. After the printer has received 80 bytes of data, it will
automatically perform a carriage return and line feed. Since graphics data typically consists of
many bytes, it's quite easy to exceed this limit. The resulting output will be garbled. You can
work around this problem by setting the line length to the maximum allowable value, 255. Put
one of these statements at the beginning of your program:
For parallel printers:
WIDTH “LPT1:”,255
For serial printers that have been opened as #1:
WIDTH #1,255
Graphics Density Selection Commands (IBM/E)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Begin Single Density
Graphics
ESC K Ln Hn [data]
27 75 Ln Hn [data]
1B 4B Ln Hn [data]
Double Density
Graphics Command
ESC L Ln Hn [data]
27 76 Ln Hn [data]
1B 4C Ln Hn [data]
Double Speed/
Double Density
Graphics Command
ESC Y Ln Hn [data]
27 89 Ln Hn [data]
1B 59 Ln Hn [data]
Quadruple Density
Graphics Command
ESC Z Ln Hn [data]
27 90 Ln Hn [data]
1B 5A Ln Hn [data]
These graphics modes correspond to the 8-pin modes and are supported by most current
DOS-based graphics software.
Parameters Ln and Hn
These parameters tell the printer how many bytes of graphics data to expect. Eight-pin graphics
have one byte of data per column. To calculate the values for Ln and Hn, first determine how
many columns of dots there will be in your graphics image. Divide this number by 256 and
assign the whole number result to Hn; assign the remainder to Ln.
62
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Graphics Select/Print Command (IBM AGM/E)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Graphics Select/Print
ESC * m n1 n2 [data]
27 42 m n1 n2 [data]
1B 2A m n1 n2 [data]
Note: The IBM AGM emulation combines the IBM Proprinter emulation with Epson LQ
graphics for special graphics applications.
This command is used to select the density, to designate the number of columns of data you'll
be sending, and to specify the data to be sent.
Parameter m
This parameter specifies which density to use when printing the graphic image. The table
below indicates the type of density for each value of m.
Table 40: Epson ESC * m Command —
8-Pin Graphics Density Codes for m Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of m
0
1
2
3
4
6
32
33
38
39
40
Graphics Type
Single Density
Double Density
High Speed Double Density
Quadruple Density
CRT I
CRT II
Single Density
Double Density
CRT III
Triple Density
Hex Density
Pins
8
8
8
8
8
8
24
24
24
24
24
Horizontal Density
(dots per inch)
60 dpi
120 dpi
120 dpi*
240 dpi*
80 dpi
90 dpi
60 dpi
120 dpi
90 dpi
180 dpi
360 dpi*
* Extrapolated (quasi density)
Parameters Ln and Hn
These parameters tell the printer how many columns of data you'll be sending: 8-pin modes
have one byte of data per column, 24-pin modes have three bytes of data per column. These
parameters can be assigned any value from 0 to 255. To calculate the values, first determine
how many columns of dots there will be in your graphics image. Divide this number by 256
and assign the whole number to Hn; assign the remainder to Ln.
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers
63
Reassign Graphics Codes Command (IBM AGM/E)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Reassign Graphics
ESC ? m n
27 63 m n
1B 3F m n
Note: The IBM AGM emulation combines the IBM Proprinter emulation with Epson LQ
graphics for special graphics applications.
You can use this command to reassign any of the graphics modes to one of the graphics
commands (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or ESC Z).
Parameter m
This parameter designates which of the four commands you're redefining. Substitute one of the
four letters—K (single density), L (double density), Y (high speed double density), or Z
(quadruple density)—for m in the command.
Parameter n
This parameter designates the density of the mode you are reassigning to the redefined code.
Substitute the appropriate value for the density you wish to select, as taken from the “Epson
ESC * m Command — 8-Pin Graphics Density Codes for m Values (24-Pin Printers)” table in
the previous command description.
When you are ready to print a graphics pattern, send the redefined command, followed by the
graphics data.
Graphics Resolution Command (IBM)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Select Graphics
Resolution/ Print
ESC [ g n1 n2 m
[data]
27 93 103 n1 n2 m
[data]
1B 5D 67 n1 n2
m
[data]
This command sets the graphics resolution and prints the graphic data.
Parameters n1 n2
Range 0 to 255. These parameters specify the number of dot columns according to the
following formula:
dot columns = n1 + (n2 * 256) +1
Parameter m
This parameter specifies the horizontal resolution of the graphics according to the following
table.
64
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Table 41: IBM ESC [ g Command —
Horizontal Graphics Resolution for m Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of m
0
1
2
3
8
Resolution (dpi)
60
120
120
240
60
Pins
8
8
8
8
24
9
120
24
11
12
180
360
24
24
Notes
Same as ESC K
Same as ESC L
Same as ESC Y
Same as ESC Z
High resolution
for ESC K
High resolution
for ESC L
Select Graphics Aspect Ratio Command (IBM)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Set graphics aspect ratio
ESC n Pn
27 110 Pn
1B 6E Pn
This command sets the vertical-to-horizontal ratio of graphics printed using the ESC K, ESC L,
ESC Y, and ESC Z graphics commands.
The possible values for Pn are:
Pn = 0, 1: Sets aspect ratio of 5:6
Pn = 2: Sets aspect ratio of 1:1
Pn ≥ 3: Dumps data up to receipt of ESC n pn command
Select Graphics Mode Command (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Select Graphics Mode
ESC ( G Ln Hn Pn
27 40 71 Ln Hn Pn
1B 28 47 Ln Hn Pn
Use this command to place the printer in graphics mode.
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers
65
Parameters Ln and Hn
Parameters Ln and Hn are used to designate the number of bytes to follow in the subsequent
parameters, where
Number of Bytes = Ln + (Hn x 256)
Ln and Hn can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal. Generally, Ln is set to 1 and Hn is set to 0.
Parameter Pn
Parameter Pn sets the graphics mode. It can have a hexadecimal value of 01 or 31.
Note: To cancel the graphics mode, enter the ESC @ command.
Set/Reset Graphics Mode Command (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Engage Raster Graphics Mode
ESC DLE G n 1
27 16 71 n 49
1B 10 47 n 31
Disengage Raster Graphics Mode
ESC DLE G n 0
27 16 71 n 48
1B 10 47 n 30
Use this command to engage and disengage the graphics mode.
Parameter n
This parameter determines how this command is handled:
n = 0: Command invalid
n = 1: data valid
n > 1: data valid; data that follows is discarded after the command has been executed.
Print Raster Graphics Command (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Print Raster Graphics
ESC . Pc Pv Ph Pm Ln Hn
[data]
27 46 Pc Pv Ph Pm Ln Hn
[data]
1B 2E Pc Pv Ph Pm Ln Hn
[data]
Use this command to print bit-image graphics horizontally.
Parameter Pc
Parameter Pc sets the mode:
Pc = 0: Full Graphics Mode
Pc = 1: Compressed Mode
66
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Parameter Pv
Parameter Pv sets the vertical dot density:
Pv = 10: 360 dots per inch (dpi)
Pv = 20: 180 dpi
Parameter Ph
Parameter Ph sets the horizontal dot density:
Ph = 10: 360 (dpi)
Ph = 20: 180 dpi
Parameter Pm
Parameter Pm sets the number of vertical dots.
Table 42: Epson ESC . Command — Valid Range of Pm Values for Pv Values
Pv Value
10
20
Valid Pm Range
0 to 48
0 to 24
Note: If Pm value is set to 0, graphics will not print.
Parameters Ln and Hn
Parameters Ln and Hn are used to designate the number of horizontal dots to be printed, where
No. of dots = Ln + (Hn x256)
For fewer than 256 dots, substitute the number of dots for Ln and set Hn = 0. For more than 256
dots, divide the number of dots by 256 and assign the whole number result to Hn, then assign
the remainder to Ln.
Ln and Hn can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal.
The maximum number of dots allowed depends on the value of Ph and the width of the printer
carriage as follows:
Table 43: Epson ESC . Command — Maximum Horizontal Dots for Ph
Values
Ph Value
10
20
Model
ML590
ML591
ML590
ML591
Maximum Dots
2880
4896
1440
2448
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers
67
68
Chapter 7: Graphics Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
This chapter describes the commands for horizontal control including the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Backspace/Carriage Return Commands
Margin Setting Commands
Horizontal Tab Commands
Indent Commands
Print Position Commands
Uni-directional Printing Commands
Incremental Printing Commands
Justification Commands
Backspace & Carriage Return Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Backspace
Carriage Return
ASCII
BS
CR
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Dec
8
13
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
08
0D
The backspace command moves the printhead one character to the left. The actual width of the
backspace depends on the current pitch. If you're using proportional spacing, the BS command
moves the printhead 1/10" to the left.
The carriage return command causes the printer to print data from the print buffer and return
the printing position to the beginning of the line. If the printer menu item Auto LF (under SetUp group) has been set to YES (factory default is NO), the printer automatically adds a line feed
to each carriage return.
Margin Setting Commands
Set Left & Right Margins Command (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Left & Right Margins
ASCII
ESC X n m
Dec
27 88 n m
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 58 n m
In the IBM emulation, the margins set by the Left & Right Margin command are set by character
columns. The actual position of the margin depends on the current pitch: a margin of 10
columns will come out as 1" in 10 cpi and 1/2" in 20 cpi. If the current pitch is proportional,
the margin is set as though it were 10 cpi. However, once you've set a margin, its absolute
position remains the same, even if you change the pitch, until you specifically reset the margin.
This saves you the work of adjusting margins with every pitch change in your document.
Note: You should always send margin commands at the beginning of a line.
Parameter n
Parameter n sets the left margin and can be any value from 0 to 254. Use a value of 0 if you
want to change the right margin only. The default setting for the left margin in the IBM
emulation is 1.
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
69
Parameter m
Parameter m sets the right margin and can be any value from 0 to 255.
Note: Be sure to specify a right margin that is at least one more than the left margin. The only
time you should use a value of 0 for the right margin is if you don't want to change the
value for the right margin when you are changing the value for the left margin.
The default settings for the right margin are specified in the table below.
Table 44: IBM ESC X Command —
Default Settings for Right Margin
Pitch
10 cpi/proportional
12 cpi
15 cpi
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Narrow Carriage Models
80
96
120
137
160
Wide Carriage Models
136
163
204
233
255
Left and Right Margin Commands (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Set Left Margin
Set Right Margin
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
ASCII
ESC l n
ESC Q n
Dec
27 108 n
27 81 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 6C n
1B 51 n
These commands set the margins by character columns. The actual position of the margin
depends on the current pitch: a margin of 10 columns will come out as one inch in 10 cpi and
one-half inch in 20 cpi. If the current pitch is proportional, the margin is set as though it were
10 cpi. However, once you've set a margin, its absolute position remains the same, even if you
change the pitch, until you specifically reset the margin. This saves you the work of adjusting
margins with every pitch change in your document.
Sending the left margin command will cancel any horizontal tab stops you may have set,
returning the printer to its default setting (tab stops every eight columns).
You should always send margin commands at the beginning of a line.
70
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
Parameter n
This parameter can range in value from 0 to 254 for the left margin and from 1 to 255 for the
right margin.
Note: You must always specify a right margin that is at least one more than the left margin.
Table 45: Epson ESC L and ESC Q Commands —
Range of Margin Settings, All 9-Pin Printers
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Proportional
ML320 E/I, ML320 Turbo, ML520
Left
Right
0-79
1-80
0-95
1-96
0-136
1-137
0-159
1-160
0-79
1-80
ML321 E/I, ML321 Turbo, ML521
Left
Right
0-135
1-136
0-162
1-163
0-232
1-233
0-254
1-255
0-135
1-136
Table 46: Epson ESC L and ESC Q Commands —
Range of Margin Settings, 24-Pin Models ML390/391 Turbo
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Proportional
ML390 Turbo
Left
Right
0-70
4-80
0-84
5-96
0-105
6-120
0-119
7-137
0-140
8-160
0-140
8-160
ML391 Turbo
Left
Right
0-126
4-136
0-151
5-163
0-189
6-204
0-215
7-233
0-252
8-255
0-252
8-255
Table 47: Epson ESC L and ESC Q Commands —
Range of Margin Settings, 24-Pin Models ML590/591
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Proportional
Left
0-76
0-91
0-114
0-130
0-152
0-76
ML590
Right
4-80
5-96
6-120
7-137
8-160
4-80
Left
0-132
0-158
0-198
0-226
0-255
0-132
ML591
Right
4-136
5-163
6-204
7-233
8-255
4-136
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
71
Left and Right Margin Commands (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Set Left Margin
Set Right Margin
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC % C n1 n2 n3
ESC % R n1 n2 n3 n4
⻬ ML520, ML521
Dec
27 37 67 n1 n2 n3
27 37 82 n1 n2 n3 n4
Hex
1B 25 43 n1 n2 n3
1B 25 52 n1 n2 n3 n4
In the MICROLINE Standard emulation, margins for these commands are measured in units of
1/120" from the leftmost printing position.
Left Margin Parameters n1 n2 n3
Parameters n1 n2 n3 represent a three-digit ASCII number for the value of the location for the left
margin. If the value you wish to assign to the left margin is 99 or less, use zero for the first digit.
Right Margin Parameters n1 n2 n3 n4
Parameters n1 n2 n3 n4 represent a four-digit ASCII number for the value of the location for the
right margin. If the value you wish to assign is less than four digits, use zeros for the first digit(s).
The right margin must be at least 60 units greater than the left margin. If no left margin has
been set, the minimum value for the right margin is 60 units.
You must set the right margin before sending any data for the line on which it is to take effect.
The Maximum Margin Values table below lists the widest allowable margins.
Table 48: ML ESC % C and ESC % R Commands —
Maximum Margin Values
Model
ML320 Std., ML320 Turbo, ML520
ML321 Std., ML321 Turbo, ML521
Left Margin n Value
0899
0999
Right Margin n Value
0960
1632
For example, suppose you want to set one-inch margins on a standard 8-1/2" page. The left
margin will be 120/120" from the leftmost position, so the command to set it is:
LPRINT CHR$(27);"%C";"120"
The right margin is 7-1/2", or 900/120" from the leftmost position, so the command to set it is:
LPRINT CHR$(27);"%R";"0900"
72
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
Horizontal Tab Commands
Execute Horizontal Tab Command (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Execute Horizontal Tab
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
ASCII
HT
Dec
9
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
09
When you turn on your printer, its tab stops are automatically set for every eight columns. Each
time you send the tab character (HT), the printhead moves eight columns to the right before
printing the next character.
Set Horizontal Tab Command (IBM/E)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Set Horizontal
Tab
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC D n1 n2 ... nk NUL
Dec
27 68 n1 n2 ... nk 0
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 44 n1 n2 ... nk 00
This command lets you set horizontal tab stops at specific columns on the page. As with
margins, the actual position of the stops depends on the pitch you’re using, and won’t change if
you switch to a different character width. Be sure to give the stops in ascending order. After you
have specified all the stops, end the sequence with a NUL character (use CHR$(0) in BASIC).
If you send the command as ESC D NUL, with no stops specified, all horizontal tab stops will
be cleared, including the 8-column default stops. Turning the printer off and on again restores
the printer's default tab stops.
Table 49: IBM/Epson ESC D Command —
Maximum Number of Horizontal Tab Stops
Emulation
IBM
Epson
Max. Tab Stops
28
32
Table 50: IBM/Epson ESC D Command —
Maximum Values for Horizontal Tab Stops
Pitch
10 cpi/proportional
12 cpi
15 cpi*
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Narrow Carriage models
79
95
119
136
159
Wide Carriage Models
135
162
203
232
255
* 15 cpi available only on ML390/391 Turbo, ML520/521 and ML590/591.
Set Tabs by Character Space Command (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
⻬ ML520, ML521
73
Function
Set Horizontal Tab
by Characters
ASCII
ESC HT x1y1z1 ...
x16y16z16 CR
Dec
27 9 x1y1z1 ...
x16y16z16 13
Hex
1B 09 x1y1z1 ...
x16y16z16 0D
This command can be used to set up to 16 horizontal tab stops at the intervals of your choice.
The actual distance represented by the tab depends on the character pitch in effect when the
printer receives the HT command.
The tab information must be entered as three-digit ASCII numbers (xyz) separated by commas,
and must be in ascending order. For tabs less than 100, enter a zero for the x and/or y digits as
appropriate.
For example, suppose you wish to set tabs at the 5th, 10th, 15th and 20th columns. The value
for x1y1z1 would be 005; the value for x2y2z2 would be 010, etc. So, you would enter the BASIC
statement
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(09);"005,010,015,020";CHR$(13)
Here are the maximum values for xnynzn for each pitch and printer model:
Table 51: ML ESC HT Command —
Maximum Values for xnynzn
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi*
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Maximum xyzw
ML320
ML520
80
080
96
096
N/A
120
137
137
160
160
Maximum xyzw
ML321 ML521
136
136
163
163
N/A
204
233
233
272
272
* 15 cpi applies only to ML520 and ML521.
Set Tabs by Dot Columns Command (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Set Horizontal
Tab
by Dot Columns
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC ETX x1y1z1w1 ...
x16y16z16w16 CR
Dec
27 3 x1y1z1w1 ...
x16y16z16w16 13
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 03 x1y1z1w1 ...
x16y16z16w16 0D
This command can be used to set up to 16 horizontal tab stops at the intervals of your choice.
Setting tabs by dot columns gives you more precise control than setting tabs by character
space.
74
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
The distance represented by the tab (distance from the center of one dot to the center of the
next dot) depends on the character pitch in effect when the printer receives the HT command,
as follows:
Table 52: MML ESC ETX Command —
Shift Increment for Character Pitches
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi*
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Proportional
Increment of Shift
1/120"
1/144"
1/180"
1/206"
1/240"
1/120"
* 15 cpi applies only to ML520 and ML521.
The tab information must be entered as four-digit ASCII numbers separated by commas, and
must be in ascending order. For tab values less than 1000, enter a zero for the x, y and/or z
digits as appropriate.
For example, suppose you want to set tabs by dot columns at 1/2", 2", 4", and 6" from the left
margin, using 12 cpi pitch. From the table above, at 12 cpi pitch, each dot produces a shift of
1/144". So, to move over 1/2" from the home position (0001, or 1/144"), the value would be
0071 ([1/2 x 144 dpi] - 1); for 2", the value would be 0287; for 4", 0575; and for 6", 0863. To
set these tabs enter the BASIC statement
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(3);"0071,0287,0575,0863";CHR$(13)
Here are the maximum values for xnynznwn for each pitch and printer model:
Table 53: ML ESC ETX Command —
XYZW Values for Setting Horizontal Tabs
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi*
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Maximum xyzw
ML320
ML520
0959
0960
1151
1152
N/A
1440
1643
1644
1917
1920
Maximum xyzw
ML321 ML521
1631
1632
1956
1956
N/A
2448
2795
2796
3261
3264
* 15 cpi applies only to ML520 and ML521.
Note: Using the maximum value for the xnynznwn tab setting may not leave enough room
between the tab stop and the right margin for a full character to print.
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
75
Clear Horizontal Tab Settings Commands (IBM/E)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Clear Horizontal Tab
Reset Horizontal Tabs
to Default
IBM
ASCII: ESC D NUL NUL
Dec: 27 68 0 0
Hex: 1B 44 00 00
ASCII: ESC R
Dec: 27 82
Hex: 1B 52
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Epson
ASCII: ESC D NUL NUL
Dec: 27 68 0 0
Hex: 1B 44 00 00
Not applicable
In the IBM emulation, the ESC D NUL command will clear all horizontal tabs, including the
default tabs. In the Epson and MICROLINE Standard emulations, these commands will clear out
the tab settings and return the printer to the default horizontal tab settings (every eight spaces).
Clear Horizontal Tab Settings Commands (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Clear Horizontal Tabs Set
by Characters
Clear Horizontal Tabs Set
by Dot Columns
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
ASCII
ESC HT CR
Dec
27 9 13
Hex
1B 09 0D
ESC ETX 0 CR
27 3 48 141
1B 3 30
8D
Horizontal Print Position Commands
Indent from Left Margin Command (IBM/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Indent from
Left Margin
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC % B n1 n2 n3 n4
Decimal
27 37 66 n1 n2 n3
n4
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hexadecimal
1B 25 42 n1 n2 n3 n4
This command causes the printing to be indented from the left margin by the number of dot
columns you specify (relative to home position, 0001).
76
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
The distance of the shift depends on the pitch engaged:
Table 54: IBM/ML ESC % B Command —
Shift Increments for Left Margin Indents
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Proportional
Increment of Shift
1/120"
1/144"
1/180"
1/206"
1/240"
1/120"
Parameters n1 through n4
These parameters represent a four-digit ASCII number. If the value you wish to assign is less
than four digits, use zeros for the first digit(s). The value is calculated relative to the home
position which is 0001 in from the left margin.
For example, suppose you wish to indent 1" from the left margin, using 12 cpi pitch. The print
position will be indented 143/144" from the home position (1/144"), so the command to set it
is:
LPRINT CHR$(27);"%B";"0144"
This command will be ignored if you set the print position outside either margin.
Set Multiple Print Positions Command (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Multiple
Print Positions
Command
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
IBM
ASCII: ESC DLE @ Pn
A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
Dec: 27 16 64 Pn
A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
Hex: 1B 10 40 Pn
A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
Epson
ASCII: ESC DLE @ Pn
A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
Dec: 27 16 64 Pn
A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
Hex: 1B 10 40 Pn
A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
ML
ASCII: ESC DLE @ Pn a1 a2
P1 P2 P3 P4
Dec: 27 16 64 Pn a1 a2 P1
P2 P3 P4
Hex: 1B 10 40 Pn a1 a2 P1
P2 P3 P4
This command is used to move the print position either to the right or to the left, either as an
absolute print position or a relative print position.
Parameter Pn
This parameter sets the number of parameter bytes to follow:
value = 0 to 127 for ML320/321 Turbo & ML520/521
value = 0 to 255 for ML390/391 Turbo & ML590/591
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
77
Parameter a1
This parameter establishes whether the print position is absolute or relative:
a1 = 0: Absolute print position
a1 = 1: Relative print position
Parameter a2
This parameter determines whether the movement will be to the left or right:
a2 = 0: Move to right (forward)
a2 = 1: Move to left (backward)
Parameters P1 P2 P3 P4
These parameters represent a four-digit ASCII number for the value of the amount of movement
to take place. If the value you wish to assign is less than four digits, use zeros for the first
digit(s). The actual amount of movement depends on the pitch engaged:
Table 55: IBM/E/ML ESC DLE @ Command —
Shift Increments for 9-Pin Models
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Proportional
Shift Increment
1/240"
1/288"
1/360"
1/411"
1/480"
1/240" for IBM & Epson, same as the
corresponding value for each cpi for ML Std.
Table 56: IBM/E/ML ESC DLE @ Command —
Shift Increments for 24-Pin Models
Print Quality
Letter Quality
Utility
Shift Increment
1/360"
1/240"
Suppose you have your pitch set at 20 cpi and want your ML 520 printer to move to a relative
dot position (a1 = 1) 1" backwards (a2 = 1). From the table above, at 20 cpi your shift will be in
increments of 1/480", so the value of P1P2P3P4 would be 0480. Send the BASIC statement
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(16);"@";"1";"1";"0480"
The table below gives the maximum values which can be designated for P1P2P3P4 for each
model printer, for each pitch, with the default margins engaged.
Note: If you send a location value outside the set left or right margin, this command will be
ignored.
78
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
Table 57: IBM/E/ML ESC DLE @ Command —
Maximum P1P2P3P4 Values for 9-Pin Models
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
15
17.1
20 cpi
ML320 Turbo, ML520
1920
2304
2880
3291
3840
ML321 Turbo, ML521
3264
3916
4896
5595
6528
Table 58: IBM/E/ML ESC DLE @ Command —
Maximum P1P2P3P4 Values for 24-Pin Models
Print Quality
Letter Quality
Utility
ML390 Turbo, ML590
2280
1920
ML391 Turbo, ML591
4896
3264
Set Relative Dot Position Command (IBM)
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Set Relative Dot Position
⻬ ML520, ML521
ASCII
ESC | Ln Hn
Dec
27 124 Ln Hn
Hex
1B 7C Ln Hn
This command lets you move the print position very precisely to either the right or the left of
the current print position. Overscore and underline characters don’t print in the space between
the two positions.
Parameters Ln and Hn
These parameters set the amount and direction of the movement. To determine their value, first
decide the distance you want to move the text or graphics, in dots, based on 120 dots per inch.
If you want to move to the right, multiply the distance by 120 dpi, then divide the result by
256. Assign the whole number result to Hn and the remainder to Ln. For example, to move 3" to
the right: (3 x 120)/256 = 1 with a remainder of 104, so Hn = 1 and Ln = 104.
If you want to move to the left, multiply the distance you wish to move by 120 dpi, then
subtract the result from 65536. Take that value and divide it by 256: assign the whole number
result to Hn and the remainder to Ln. For example, to move 3" to the left:
3 x 120 = 360
65536 - 360 = 65176
65176/256 = 254 (Hn), with a remainder of 152 (Ln)
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
79
Set Relative Dot Position Command (IBM)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Set Relative Dot Position to Right
Set Relative Dot Position to Left
ASCII
ESC d n1 n2
ESC e n1 n2
Dec
27 100 n1 n2
27 64 n1 n2
Hex
1B 101 n1 n2
1B 65 n1 n2
These commands move the printhead to the left or right of the current print position in
increments of 1/120". The number of increments equals n1 + (n2 x 255). The maximum value is
1632.
Set Relative Dot Position Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Relative Dot Position
ASCII
ESC \ Ln Hn
Dec
27 92 Ln Hn
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 5C Ln Hn
This command lets you move the print position very precisely to either the right or the left of
the current print position. Overscore characters don’t print in the space between the two
positions.
For the ML390 Turbo and ML391 Turbo printers, this command will move in increments
established by the Set Unit command (see Chapter 12). The default basic increment of
movement in the LQ mode is 1/80"; in the Utility mode, 1/120".
Parameters Ln and Hn
These parameters set the amount and direction of the movement. To determine their value, first
decide the distance you want to move the text or graphics, in dots, then multiply the distance
by 120 dots per inch. Next, divide the result by 256 Assign the whole number result to Hn and
the remainder to Ln.
Set Absolute Dot Position Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Set Absolute Dot
Position
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
ASCII
ESC $ Ln Hn
Dec
27 36 Ln Hn
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 24 Ln Hn
This command lets you place text or graphics very precisely on the page. It uses the left margin
as a reference point, and moves the print position in 1/60" increments.
Parameters Ln and Hn
These variables determine the amount of movement. To calculate their values, multiply the
distance you wish to move by 60, then divide the result by 256 and assign the whole number
result to Hn and the remainder to Ln.
For example:
to move the print position over 2":
80
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
2 x 60 = 120
120/256 = 0 (Hn), with a remainder of 120 (Ln)
to move the print position over 5":
5 x 60 = 300
300/256 = 1 (Hn), with a remainder of 44 (Ln)
Move to the Right & Left Commands (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Move to Left
Move to Right
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
ASCII
ESC % F n1 n2 n3 n4
ESC % E n1 n2 n3 n4
Dec
27 37 70 F n1 n2 n3 n4
27 37 69 n1 n2 n3 n4
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 25 46 F n1 n2 n3 n4
1B 25 45 n1 n2 n3 n4
These commands move the print position to the right or to the left of the current position in the
amount you specify. Underline characters don’t print in the space between the two positions.
Parameters n1 n2 n3 n4
These parameters represent a four-digit ASCII number for the value of the amount of movement
to take place. If the value you wish to assign is less than four digits, use zeros for the first
digit(s). The actual amount of movement depends on the pitch engaged:
Table 59: ML ESC % F and ESC % E Commands —
Movement Increments for Pitch Settings
Pitch
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi
17.1 cpi
20 cpi
Proportional
Movement Increments
1/120"
1/144"
1/180"
1/206"
1/240"
Same as the corresponding value for each cpi
For example, suppose you have your pitch set at 20 cpi and want your printer to move 1" to the
right. From the table above, at 20 cpi your shift will be in increments of 1/240", so the value of
n1n2n3n4 would be 0240 (1" / 1/240"). Send the BASIC statement
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(37);CHR$(69);"0240"
Note: If you send a location value outside the set left or right margin, this command will be
ignored.
Uni-directional Printing Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Uni-directional Printing On
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
IBM
ASCII: ESC U 1
Dec: 27 85 1
Hex: 1B 55 01
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Epson
ASCII: ESC U 1
Dec: 27 85 1
Hex: 1B 55 01
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
ML*
ASCII: ESC Dec: 27 45
Hex: 1B 2D
81
Uni-directional Printing Off
Print Uni-directional
for One Line Only
ASCII: ESC U 0
Dec: 27 85 0
Hex: 1B 55 00
Not applicable
ASCII: ESC U 0
Dec: 27 85 0
Hex: 1B 55 00
ASCII: ESC <
Dec: 27 60
Hex: 1B 3C
ASCII: ESC =
Dec: 27 61
Hex: 1B 3D
Not applicable
Your printer is designed to maximize speed by printing alternately from the left and right
(bi-directional printing), rather than moving the printhead back to the left margin so that each
line prints from left to right (uni-directional printing). Use uni-directional printing when precise
vertical alignment from line to line is critical.
You can also select uni-directional graphics printing in the printer menu (see "Menu Mode" in
your printer manual).
Incremental Printing Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Incremental Printing On
Incremental Printing Off
ASCII
ESC i 1
ESC i 0
Dec
27 105 1
27 105 0
Hex
1B 69 01
1B 69 00
The Incremental Printing On command causes the printer to print each individual character as
it is received, as opposed to storing information and printing a line at a time. If you have a
software application that passes information to the printer one keystroke at a time, this
command allows your printer to function as a typewriter.
The print location of the next character is indicated by a red “M” to the left of the printhead on
the ribbon shield.
82
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
Justification Commands (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select Left Justification
Select Center Justification
Select Right Justification
Select Full (Left & Right) Justification
ASCII
ESC a 0
ESC a 1
ESC a 2
ESC a 3
Dec
27 97 0
27 97 1
27 97 2
27 97 3
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 61 00
1B 61 01
1B 61 02
1B 61 03
These commands let you specify the alignment of text on the page: along the left or right
margin, centered between the margins, or along both the left and right margins. When you are
using center, right or full justification, the backspace character (ASCII BS, decimal 8) and
horizontal tabs won't function. If you're using full justification, use a carriage return only at the
end of a paragraph, not at the end of each line.
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
83
84
Chapter 8: Horizontal Control Commands
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
This chapter describes the commands for vertical control including the following:
• Page Length Commands
• Vertical Position Commands
• Form Feed Command
• Top of Form Commands
• Line Feed Commands
• Top & Bottom Margin Command
• Line Spacing Commands
• Skip Over Perforation Commands
• Vertical Tab Commands
Set Page Length Commands
Set Page Length in Inches Command (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Set Page Length
in Inches
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
IBM
ASCII: ESC C NUL n
Dec: 27 67 0 n
Hex: 1B 43 00 n
Epson
ASCII: ESC C NUL n
Dec: 27 67 0 n
Hex: 1B 43 00 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
ML
ASCII: ESC G Hn Ln
Dec: 27 71 Hn Ln
Hex: 1B 47 Hn Ln
This command sets the page length in inches. If you will most often be using one of the
standard page lengths available through the printer menu (see "Menu Mode" in your printer
manual), it’s a good idea to use the printer menu to set the default page length and then use the
page length command whenever you wish to change it temporarily.
To set the page length in inches in either the IBM or Epson emulation, use the command ESC C
NUL n. This sets the page length in increments of 1" times the value of the variable "n." The
value of n can be from 1 to 22.
To set the page length in inches in the MICROLINE Standard emulation, use the command ESC
G Hn Ln. This sets the page length in increments of ½
" x the value of the variables Hn Ln.
Variables Hn Ln represent a 2-digit ASCII number ranging from 00 to 99. For lengths of less
than 4½
", use a zero for Hn. For example, to set a page length of 14 inches, enter the BASIC
statement
LPRINT CHR$(27);"G";"28"
Set Page Length in Lines Command (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Page Length in Lines
IBM
ASCII: ESC C n
Dec: 27 67 n
Hex: 1B 43 n
Epson
ASCII: ESC C n
Dec: 27 67 n
Hex: 1B 43 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
ML
ASCII: ESC F Hn Ln
Dec: 27 70 Hn Ln
Hex: 1B 46 Hn Ln
You can set the page length in either inches or lines. If you will most often be using one of the
standard page lengths available through the printer menu (see “Menu Mode” in your printer
manual), it's a good idea to use the printer menu to set the default page length and then use the
page length command whenever you wish to change it temporarily.
To set the page length by lines in either the IBM or Epson emulation, use the command ESC C
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
85
n. The page length will be the result of multiplying the line pitch by the value of the variable
“n.” In the IBM emulation, the value of n can be from 1 to 255; in the Epson emulation, it can
be from 1 to 127. The actual page length will depend on the line spacing engaged.
To set the page length by lines in the MICROLINE Standard emulation, use the command ESC F
Hn Ln. The page length will be the result of multiplying the line pitch by the value of the
variables Hn Ln. Variables Hn Ln represent a 2-digit ASCII number ranging from 00 to 99. For
Hn Ln numbers less than 10, use a zero for Hn. For example, to set a page length of nine lines,
enter the BASIC statement
LPRINT CHR$(27);"H";"09"
The actual page length will depend on the line pitch engaged.
Set Page Length in Defined Unit Command (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Page Length
in Defined Unit
ASCII
ESC ( C 2 0 Lp Hp
Dec
27 40 67 50 48 Lp Hp
Hex
1B 28 43 32 30 Lp Hp
You can use this command to set the page length in multiples of the line spacing established by
the Set Unit command (see Chapter 12).
Parameters Lp and Hp
Parameters Lp and Hp are used to designate the page length, as a mutliple of whatever line
spacing is engaged:
Page length = [Lp + (Hp x 256)] x line spacing increment engaged
Lp and Hp can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal.
You can set the page length over a range of from 0 to 22 inches. If you will most often be using
one of the standard page lengths available through the printer menu (see “Menu Mode” in your
printer manual), it's a good idea to use the printer menu to set the default page length and then
use this command whenever you wish to change it temporarily.
86
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
Form Feed Command (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Form Feed
ASCII
FF
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Dec
12
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
0C
When you send a form feed command, the printer prints any data that is in its buffer, and the
print position moves to the top of the next page. You can also use the FORM FEED button on
the control panel to feed a page through the printer.
Line Feed Commands
Line Feed with Carriage Return Command (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Line Feed, with Carriage Return
ASCII
LF
Dec
10
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
0A
This command makes the printer print a line, then moves the print position down one line and
executes a carriage return, putting the print position at the left margin. The amount of vertical
movement depends on the current line spacing. (See “Line Spacing,” below for details.)
In the IBM and Epson emulations, this command cancels one-line double width printing.
Line Feed without Carriage Return Command (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Graphics Line Feed, without Carriage Return
ASCII
ESC DC2
⻬ ML520, ML521
DEC
27 18
Hex
1B 12
This command drops the printing down a line without returning to the left margin. This makes
it possible to overstrike a line of printing or create special effects such as double underlines.
Line Feed & Carriage Return Selection Command (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Select Line Feed & Carriage Return
ASCII
ESC ? n :
Dec
25 63 n 58
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 3F n 3A
This command performs a number of different carriage return/line feed combinations,
depending on the value of n:
Table 60: ML ESC ? Command —
Carriage Return/Line Feed Codes for n Values
Value of n
Operation
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
87
33
34
35
48
49
Carriage return only
Forward line feed, no carriage return
Forward line feed with a carriage return
Reverse line feed, no carriage return
Reverse line feed with a carriage return
Fine Line Feed Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Perform n/216"
Line Feed
Perform n/144"
Line Feed
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
IBM
ASCII: ESC J n
Dec: 27 74 n
Hex: 1B 4A n
ASCII: ESC % 5 n
Dec: 27 37 53 n
Hex: 1B 25 35 n
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Perform n/180"
Line Feed
Perform n/360"
Line Feed
Epson
ASCII: ESC J n
Dec: 27 74 n
Hex: 1B 4A n
ASCII: ESC % 5 n
Dec: 27 37 53 n
Hex: 1B 25 35 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
ML
Not applicable
ASCII: ESC % 5 n
Dec: 27 37 53 n
Hex: 1B 25 35 n
⻬ ML590, ML591
IBM
ASCII: ESC J n
Dec: 27 74 n
Hex: 1B 4A n
ASCII: ESC % 4 n
Dec: 27 37 52 n
Hex: 1B 25 34 n
Epson
ASCII: ESC J n
Dec: 27 74 n
Hex: 1B 4A n
ASCII: ESC ] n
Dec: 27 93 n
Hex: 1B 5D n
ML
Not applicable
Not applicable
Unlike the ESC % 5 n command, the ESC J n command is not accompanied by a carriage
return, and, in the IBM and Epson emulations, does not cancel one-line double width printing.
In the IBM and Epson emulations, the value of n can be any whole number from 0 to 255.
In the MICROLINE Standard emulation, the value of n can be any whole number from 0 to
127.
If you use n = 0, no line feed will be performed.
88
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
Perform Line Feed Command (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Line Feed Stored by ESC A n
ASCII
ESC 2
Dec
27 50
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 32
The ESC 2 command sets the line feed value stored using the ESC A n command described later
in this chapter under “Line Spacing Commands.” It must follow the ESC A n command—if it
doesn’t, the printer will reset the line spacing to the current menu setting.
Auto Line Feed On/Off Commands (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Auto Line Feed On
Auto Line Feed Off
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
ASCII
ESC 5 1
ESC 5 0
Dec
27 53 1
27 53 0
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 35 01
1B 35 00
When you activate automatic line feed, the printer will add a line feed to each carriage return
code it receives. You can also control this feature through the printer menu (see "Menu Mode"
in your printer manual).
Reverse Line Feed Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Reverse Line Feed
n/216" Reverse Line Feed
n/180" Reverse Line Feed
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
IBM
ML
Epson
9-Pin Models
ASCII: ESC ]
Set in multiples
Dec: 27 93
of 1/216": see
Hex: 1B 5D
command below
Not applicable ASCII: ESC j n
Dec: 27 106 n
Hex: 1B 6A n
24-Pin Models
Not applicable ASCII: ESC j n
Dec: 27 106 n
Hex: 1B 6A n
ASCII: ESC LF
Dec: 27 10
Hex: 1B 0A
Not applicable
Not applicable
Use the reverse line feed command to move the print position up instead of down. Be careful
when using reverse line feeds with the optional pull tractor: print registration may be affected.
In the Epson emulation, the reverse line feed command causes the printer to finish printing the
line, then move the print position up an amount equal to n/216": n can be any whole number
from 0 to 255. If you use n = 0, the command will be ignored. No carriage return is executed,
regardless of the setting for Auto CR in the menu (see “Menu Mode” in your printer manual).
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
89
Line Spacing Commands
General Line Spacing Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Line Spacing
to 1/6"
IBM PPR
Not applicable
IBM AGM
Not applicable
Set Line Spacing
to 1/8"
ASCII: ESC 0
Dec: 27 48
Hex: 1B 30
ASCII: ESC 1
Dec: 27 49
Hex: 1B 31
ASCII: ESC 0
Dec: 27 48
Hex: 1B 30
ASCII: ESC 1
Dec: 27 49
Hex: 1B 31
Set Line Spacing
to 7/72"
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Epson
ASCII: ESC 2
Dec: 27 50
Hex: 1B 32
ASCII: ESC 0
Dec: 27 48
Hex: 1B 30
ASCII: ESC 1
Dec: 27 49
Hex: 1B 31
ML
ASCII: ESC 6
Dec: 27 54
Hex: 1B 36
ASCII: ESC 8
Dec: 27 56
Hex: 1B 38
Not applicable
The most common line spacings for text are six and eight lines per inch (lpi). A spacing of 8 lpi
works well with compressed character pitches, and lets you fit more lines on a page. In the IBM
and Epson emulations you can also set a line spacing of 7/72".
Fine-Increment Line Spacing Commands for 9-Pin Printers (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Set Line Spacing to n/72"
Set Line Spacing to n/144"
Set Line Spacing to n/216"
IBM
ASCII: ESC A n*
Dec: 27 65 n
Hex: 1B 41 n
ASCII: ESC % 9 n
Dec: 27 37 57 n
Hex: 1B 25 39 n
ASCII: ESC 3 n
Dec: 27 51 n
Hex: 1B 33 n
Epson
ASCII: ESC A n
Dec: 27 65 n
Hex: 1B 41 n
ASCII: ESC % 9 n
Dec: 27 37 57 n
Hex: 1B 25 39 n
ASCII: ESC 3 n
Dec: 27 51 n
Hex: 1B 33 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
ML
Not applicable
ASCII: ESC % 9 n
Dec: 27 37 57 n
Hex: 1B 25 39 n
Not applicable
* In the IBM mode, the ESC A n command must be followed by the ESC 2 Perform Line Feed
command (described earlier in this chapter) to set the value of n.
These commands let you control vertical movement in very fine increments, which helps with
the precise placement of graphics. The actual amount of movement is set by the value of
parameter n which can vary, depending on the emulation.
Table 61: IBM/E/ML Fine Increment Line Spacing Commands —
Values of Parameter n
Increment
n/72"
90
Emulation
IBM
Epson
Values of n
0 to 255
0 to 85, 128 to 213
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
n/144"
IBM
Epson
ML
IBM
Epson
n/216"
0 to 127
0 to 127
0 to 127
0 to 255
0 to 255
Whenever a value of zero is assigned to n, the line spacing command will be ignored.
ESC A n Line Spacing Command for 24-Pin Printers (IBM/E)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Set Line Spacing to n/60
IBM PPR
Not applicable
Set Line Spacing to n/72"
ASCII: ESC A n*
Dec: 27 65 n
Hex: 1B 41 n
IBM AGM
ASCII: ESC A n
Dec: 27 65 n
Hex: 1B 41 n
Not applicable
Epson
ASCII: ESC A n
Dec: 27 65 n
Hex: 1B 41 n
Not applicable
* In the IBM ProPrinter mode, the ESC A n command must be followed by the ESC 2
Perform Line Feed command (described earlier in this chapter) to set the value of n.
This command sets the line spacing to either n/60" or n/72", depending on the emulation
selected. The actual amount of movement is set by the value of parameter n which can vary,
depending on the emulation:
Table 62: IBM/Epson ESC A Command —
Values of Parameter n
Increment
n/60
n/72
Emulation(s)
IBM AGM, Epson
IBM PPR
Values of n
0 to 127
1 to 255
Whenever a value of zero is assigned to n, the line spacing command will be ignored.
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
91
ESC 3 n Line Spacing Command for 24-Pin Printers (IBM/E)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
Set Line Spacing to n/180"
IBM PPR
Not applicable
Set Line Spacing to n/216"
ASCII: ESC 3 n**
Dec: 27 51 n
Hex: 1B 33 n
IBM AGM
ASCII: ESC 3 n**
Dec: 27 51 n
Hex: 1B 33 n
ASCII: ESC 3 n**
Dec: 27 51 n
Hex: 1B 33 n
Epson
ASCII: ESC 3 n
Dec: 27 51 n
Hex: 1B 33 n
Not applicable
** In the IBM mode, the line spacing increment for the ESC 3 n command is controlled by
the Set Vertical Unit commands described below.
This command lets you control vertical movement in fine increments, which helps with the
precise placement of graphics.
In the IBM emulations, the increment of the line spacing set by this command is controlled by
the Set Vertical Unit commands described below.
The actual amount of movement is set by the value of parameter n which can vary, depending
on the emulation:
Table 63: IBM/Epson ESC 3 Command —
Values of Parameter n
Emulation
IBM PPR
Epson, IBM AGM
Values of n
1 to 255
0 to 255
Whenever a value of zero is assigned to n, the line spacing command will be ignored.
n/360-Inch Line Spacing Commands for 24-Pin Printers (IBM/E)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Line Spacing to n/360"
⻬ ML590, ML591
IBM PPR
ASCII: ESC % 8 n
Dec: 27 37 56 n
Hex: 1B 25 38 n
Epson
ASCII: ESC [ n
Dec: 27 91 n
Hex 1B 5B n
or
ASCII: ESC + n
Dec: 27 43 n
Hex: 1b 2b n
These commands let you set the line spacing in 1/360" increments for precise placement of
graphics. The actual amount of movement is set by the value of parameter n which can vary,
depending on the emulation:
92
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
Table 64: IBM/Epson n/360" Line Spacing Commands —
Values of Parameter n
Emulation
IBM
Epson
Values of n
1 to 255
0 to 255
Whenever a value of zero is assigned to n, the line spacing command will be ignored.
Set Vertical Units (IBM)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Vertical Units
⻬ ML590, ML591
ASCII
ESC [ \ 4 0 0 0
00n
Dec
27 91 92 52 48 48 48
48 48 n
Hex
1B 5B 5C 34 30 30 30
30 30 n
This command defines the vertical spacing units used by the ESC 3 n command in the IBM
emulation (described above), as follows:
Table 65: IBM ESC [ \ Command —
Values of Parameter n
Values of n
180
216
Spacing Unit
1/180"
1/216"
Vertical Tab Commands
When you turn your printer on, it doesn't have any vertical tab stops. Sending a VT command
with no stops set will produce a single line feed.
The commands described below are used to set vertical tab stops. In the Epson and
MICROLINE Standard emulations, you have the option of entering a single set of vertical tab
stops or of using the electronic Vertical Format Unit (VFU) to program multiple sets of vertical
tabs, called channels. The IBM emulation permits you to enter one set of stops, but does not
have the VFU feature.
The actual position of the stops depends on the line spacing in effect when you send the
command. For example, at 6 lines per inch, a tab stop of 24 will appear four inches from the
top of the page, whereas at 8 lines per inch, the stop will be positioned three inches from the
top of the page. However, once you've set the vertical tab stops, their position is absolute, and
won’t move, even if you later change the line spacing.
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
93
Execute Vertical Tab Command (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Execute Vertical Tab
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
ASCII
VT
Dec
11
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B
Set Vertical Tabs Command (IBM/E)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Set Vertical Tabs
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
IBM
ASCII: ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
Dec: 27 66 n1 n2 ... nk 0
Hex: 1B 42 n1 n2 ... nk 00
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Epson
ASCII: ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
Dec: 27 66 n1 n2 ... nk 0
Hex: 1B 42 n1 n2 ... nk 00
In the IBM and Epson emulations, you can use the ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL command to set
vertical tab stops. Once you've set the stops, each time you issue a VT command, the print
position will move down to the next stop position.
Parameters n1 through nk
These parameters designate the individual stops. In the IBM emulation, you can set up to 64
stops (n1 through n64). In the Epson emulation, you can set up to 16 stops. In both emulations,
the value of each n can be any whole number from 1 to 255 (0 to 255 for Models ML390T and
ML391T), designating how many lines to skip down to that tab stop. You must enter the stops
in increasing order (n1 > n2 > n3, etc.), and end the series with the NUL character.
Clear Vertical Tabs Command (IBM/E)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
Function
Clear Vertical Tabs
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
IBM Only
ASCII: ESC R
Dec: 27 82
Hex: 1B 52
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
IBM & Epson
ASCII: ESC B NUL
Dec: 27 66 0
Hex: 1B 42 00
These commands will delete all vertical tab stops. In the IBM emulation, the ESC R command
will reset the tabs to the default settings.
94
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
Vertical Format Unit [VFU] Commands (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Vertical Format
Unit (VFU)
ASCII
ESC b m n1 n2 ... nk
NUL
Dec
27 98 m n1 n2 ... nk
0
Select Vertical Tab
Channel
ESC / n
27 47 n
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 62 m n1 n2 ...
nk
00
1B 2F n
The Epson emulation gives you the option of setting up to eight separate channels of vertical
tab stops using the command ESC b m n1 n2 ... nk NUL.
Parameter m
Parameter m designates the channel to which the tab stops are being assigned and can have
any whole number value from 0 to 7.
Parameters n1 through nk
Parameters n1 through nk designate the individual stops for each channel. You can set up to 16
stops (n1 through n16). The value of n can be any whole number from 0 to 255, designating how
many lines to skip down to that tab stop. You must enter the stops in increasing order (n1 > n2 >
n3, etc.), and end the series with the NUL character.
Once you've set up the channels you're using, send the ESC / n command to specify which
channel to select (replace n with desired channel number, 0 through 7), followed by the VT
command to advance to the next tab stop in the selected sequence.
For example, the following BASIC program will set stops in three channels, and then perform a
series of vertical tabs in the different channels:
5 REM Stops in channel 0: lines 10, 20, 30, 40, 50
10 LPRINT CHR$(27);"b";CHR$(0);CHR$(10);CHR$(20);CHR$(30);
CHR$(40);CHR$(50);CHR$(0)
20 REM Stops in channel 1: lines 5, 15, 35, 45, 55 30 LPRINT
CHR$(27);"b";CHR$(1);CHR$(5);CHR$(15);CHR$(35);CHR$(45);
CHR$(55);CHR$(0)
40 REM Stops in channel 2: lines 12, 24, 48
50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"b";CHR$(2);CHR$(12);CHR$(24); CHR$(48);CHR$(0)
60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"/";CHR$(1): REM Select channel 1
70 LPRINT CHR$(11);"This prints on line 5"
80 LPRINT CHR$(11);CHR$(11);"This prints on line 35"
90 LPRINT CHR$(27);"/";CHR$(2): REM Select channel 2
100 LPRINT CHR$(11);"This prints on line 48"
110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"/";CHR$(0): REM Select channel 0
120 LPRINT CHR$(11);"This prints on line 50"
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
95
Vertical Format Unit (VFU) Commands (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Set Vertical Format
Unit (VFU)
Execute VFU Vertical Tab
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
ASCII
DC4 SP1...SP1 n
... SP...SP ?
VT n
Hex
14 20...20 n ...
20...20 3F
1B n
Dec
20 32...32 n ...
32...32 63
11 n
In the MICROLINE Standard emulation, the electronic Vertical Format Unit lets you program up
to 12 different sets of vertical tabs. You can load a maximum of 54 tab stops into one set of
channels. The command DC4 SP...SP n ... SP...SP ? is used to set up the tabs. Then whenever
the printer receives a VT code followed by a channel code, it will skip to the next tab stop in
that channel.
To load in your selected tabs, follow the DC4 code with one SP code (decimal 32) for each line
to be skipped to advance down the point where you want the first tab stop. For example, to
advance down three lines, use DC4 SP SP SP. Then enter the value you wish to assign for the
channel code n, taken from the table below. Next add more SP codes equal to the number of
lines to be skipped down to the next tab stop, followed by the next channel code value.
Continue this process until you've entered all the stops you want (up to a maximum of 12) for
that channel. Add enough spaces at the end of the sequence so that the number of spaces in
the sequence equals the number of lines on your page. Follow this with the ? character
(decimal 63).
Once you've set up the channels, send the VT n command to execute a vertical tab to the next
stop in the channel code sequence specified by n.
Table 66: ML VFU Commands —
Usable Channel Codes for Parameter n
ASCII
Dec
1
49
2
50
3
51
4
52
5
53
6
54
7
55
8
56
9
57
:
58
;
59
<
60
Vertical Position Commands
Skip Down Command (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Skip Down Selected Number of
Lines
ASCII
ESC VT Hn Ln
⻬ ML520, ML521
Dec
27 11 Hn Ln
Hex
1B 0B Hn Ln
The skip down command makes it easy to move rapidly down a page. This is a useful feature
when you are creating headings or filling in forms. The variables Hn Ln represent a 2-digit ASCII
number from 00 to 99 which allows you to skip up to 99 lines; a value of 00 for Hn Ln in the
command results in no line feed.
Set Relative Vertical Position Command (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
96
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
Function
Set Relative Vertical
Print Position
ASCII
ESC ( v Ln Hn Lp Hp
Dec
27 40 118 Ln Hn Lp
Hp
Hex
1B 28 76 Ln Hn Lp Hp
This command lets you move the print position very precisely either upward (up to 0.5-inch) or
downward (up to 46.2 inches) from the current print position, in increments established by the
Set Unit command (see Chapter 12).
Parameters Ln and Hn
Normally Ln is set to 2 and Hn is set to 0.
Parameters Lp and Hp
These parameters can have a value of 0 to 255 and are used to set the actual amount of vertical
movement, using the following equation:
[Lp + (Hp x 256)] x increment set by ESC ( U Ln Hn Pn command
For reverse (upward) movement, set bit 6 of Hp to 1. For forward (downward) movement, set bit
6 of Hp to 0.
Table 67: Epson ESC ( v Command —
Hexadecimal Values for Lp Hp
1/360”
Forward
Reverse
1/180”
0001-3FFF
7F40-7FFF
1/120”
0001-207F
7FA7-7FFF
1/90”
0001-15AA
7FC5-7FFF
1/72”
0001-103F
7FD4-7FFF
1/60”
0001-0CFF
7FDD-7FFF
0001-0AD5
7FE3-7FFF
Notes: If the reverse line feed value exceeds the Top of Form position or the top margin, the
print position will start at the TOF or top margin position.
If the forward line feed value exceeds the bottom margin, the print position will start at
the top margin position on the following page. If Skip Over Perforation is set and the
forward line feed value exceeds the skip over perforation area, the print position will
start athe Top of Form position on the next page.
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
97
Set Absolute Vertical Position Command (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Absolute
Vertical
Print Position
ASCII
ESC ( V Ln Hn Lp Hp
Dec
27 40 86 Ln Hn Lp Hp
Hex
1B 28 56 Ln Hn Lp Hp
This command lets you place text or graphics very precisely on the page. It uses the top margin
as a reference point, and moves the print position in increments established by the Set Unit
command (see Chapter 12).
Parameters Ln and Hn
Normally Ln is set to 2 and Hn is set to 0.
Parameters Lp and Hp
These parameters are used to set the actual amount of vertical movement, using the following
equation:
[Lp + (Hp x 256)] x increment set by ESC ( U Ln Hn Pn command
Top of Form Commands (IBM/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
Function
Set Top of Form
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
IBM
ASCII: ESC 4
Dec: 27 52
Hex: 1B 34
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
ML
ASCII: ESC 5
Dec: 27 53
Hex: 1B 35
When you send these commands, a new top of form is set at the current position of the
printhead. In both emulations, you can also set a new top of form using the front panel (see
"Top of Form" in the index of your printer manual).
Set Page Format Command (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Set Top & Bottom Margins
ASCII
ESC ( c 2 0 Lt Ht Lb
Hb
Dec
27 40 99 50 48
Lt Ht Lb Hb
Hex
1B 28 63 32 30
Lt Ht Lb Hb
This command is used to set the top and bottom margins as a multiple of the line spacing
increment established by the Set Unit command (see Chapter 12)..
Parameters Lt and Ht
Parameters Lt and Ht are used to set the top margin, as a mutliple of whatever line spacing is
engaged:
Top margin = [Lt + (Ht x 256)] x line spacing increment engaged
98
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
Lt and Ht can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal.
Note: The top margin must be set at a value less than the bottom margin.
Parameters Lb and Hb
Parameters Lb and Hb are used to set the top margin, as a mutliple of whatever line spacing is
engaged:
Bottom margin = [Lb + (Hb x 256)] x line spacing increment engaged
Lb and Hb can have any value from 0 to 255 decimal.
Note: The bottom margin must be set at a value greater than the top margin and less than the
page length.
Skip Over Perforation Commands
Skip Over Perforation On/Off Commands (IBM/E)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Skip Over Perforation On
Skip Over Perforation Off
ASCII
ESC N n
ESC O
Dec
27 78 n
27 79
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Hex
1B 4E n
1B 4F
If the skip over perforation is set to Yes (factory default is No) on the menu, the printer will
automatically skip an inch from the bottom of one page to the top of the next.
This command changes the number of lines skipped at the bottom of the page for the IBM and
Epson emulations.
Parameter n
This parameter sets the amount of the skip. “n” is any whole number from 1 to 255 for both
emulations and all models except the ML390 Turbo and ML391 Turbo: for the Epson emulation
in the ML390/391 Turbo printers, “n” is any whole number from 1 to 127.
The amount of skip is calculated by multiplying the current line spacing by the value of n.
Once you've set the amount of skip, it won't increase or decrease if you change the line
spacing.
To return the perforation skip to its default setting, enter the command ESC O.
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
99
Skip Over Perforation On/Off Commands (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Skip Over Perforation On
Skip Over Perforation Off
ASCII
ESC % S 1
ESC % S 0
Dec
27 37 83 49
27 37 83 48
⻬ ML520, ML521
Hex
1B 25 53 31
1B 25 53 30
If the skip over perforation is set to Yes (factory default is No) on the menu, the printer will
automatically skip an inch from the bottom of one page to the top of the next.
100
Chapter 9: Vertical Control Commands
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
9-Pin models ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo, ML520 and ML521 incorporate eight bar codes in
both the Epson FX and IBM emulations:
•
Code 39
•
UPC* E
•
Code 128
•
EAN** 8
•
Interleaved 2 of 5
•
EAN** 13
•
UPC* A
•
Postnet
*UPC = Universal Product Code
**EAN = European Article Numbering
These commands are the same as those given in Chapter 11 for the 24-pin printers; however,
the values for the various parameters are different for the 24-pin printers.
Note: 9-pin models ML320 Epson/IBM, ML321 Epson/IBM, ML320 Standard and ML321
Standard do NOT have bar code commands
Bar Code Commands
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
Function
Select Bar Code
Type
and Size
Print Bar Code Data
Print Postnet Bar
Code Data
⻬ ML520, ML521
ASCII
ESC DLE A m
n1 ... n8
Dec
27 16 65 m
n1 ... n8
Hex
1B 10 41 m
n1 ... n8
ESC DLE B m n
[data]
ESC DLE C P1 [data]
27 16 66 m n
[data]
27 16 67 P1 [data]
1B 10 42 m n
[data]
1B 10 43 P1 [data]
To print bar codes other than Postnet, you must enter two commands:
•
Select Bar Code Type & Size
•
Print Bar Code Data (provides data and initiates printing)
To print Postnet bar codes, use the command ESC DLE C P1 [data] discussed at the end of this
chapter.
Code 39 Bar Code Commands
Also known as 3 of 9 Code, Code 39 is used in non-retail applications. Each character has five
bars and four spaces. Code patterns have been developed for 44 different alphabetic, numeric
and graphic characters. The digits can be any ASCII character from SP to Z (32 to 102 Dec, 20
to 66 Hex).
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
101
Select Code 39 Bar Code Command
The command for selecting Code 39 is
ESC DLE A m 2 0 n3 n4 n5 n6 n7 n8
Code 39 Parameter m
Parameter m designated the number of parameters to be set. The value of m is normally set to
hexadecimal 08.
Code 39 Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in units of 6/72", as calculated by the
equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 6/72"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
Code 39 Parameter n5
This parameter sets the width of the narrow bars in 1/144" increments.
Table 68: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command —
Narrow Bar Widths for Parameter n5 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
1/144"
2/144"
3/144"
4/144"
5/144"
6/144"
7/144"
Code 39 Parameter n6
This parameter sets the width of the narrow space characters in 1/144" increments.
Table 69: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command —
Narrow Space Widths for Parameter n6 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Value of n6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
102
Character Width
4/144"
5/144"
6/144"
7/144"
8/144"
9/144"
10/144"
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Code 39 Parameter n7
Parameter n7 is used in combination with parameters n5 and n6 to set the width of the wide bars
and the wide spaces.
Table 70: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command —
Wide Bar Widths for Parameter n5, n6, n7 Values (9-Pin Printers)
n7 = 1
n7 = 2
n7 = 3
n7 = 4
n7 = 5
n7 = 6
n7 = 7
n5 = 1
4/144"
5/144"
6/144"
7/144"
9/144"
10/144"
11/144"
n5 = 2
6/144"
7/144"
9/144"
11/144"
13/144
14/144
16/144"
n5 = 3
8/144"
10/144
12/144"
14/144
17/144"
19/144"
21/144"
n5 = 4
10/144"
12/144"
15/144"
18/144"
21/144"
23/144"
26/144"
n5 = 5
12/144"
15/144"
18/144"
21/144"
25/144"
28/144"
31/144"
n5 = 6
14/144"
17/144"
21/144"
25/144"
29/144"
32/144"
36/144"
n5 = 7
16/144"
20/144
24/144"
28/144"
33/144"
37/144"
41/144"
Table 71: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command —
Wide Space Widths for Parameter n5, n6, n7 Values (9-Pin Printers)
n7 = 1
n7 = 2
n7 = 3
n7 = 4
n7 = 5
n7 = 6
n7 = 7
n6 = 1
7/144"
8/144"
9/144"
10/144"
12/144"
13/144"
14/144"
n6 = 2
9/144"
10/144"
12/144"
14/144"
16/144"
18/144"
19/144"
n6 = 3
11/144"
13/144"
15/144"
18/144"
20/144"
22/144"
24/144"
n6 = 4
13/144"
15/144"
18/144"
21/144"
24/144"
27/144"
29/144"
n6= 5
15/144"
18/144"
21/144"
25/144"
28/144"
31/144"
34/144"
n6 = 6
17/144"
20/144"
24/144"
28/144"
32/144"
36/144"
39/144"
n6 = 7
19/144"
23/144"
27/144"
31/144"
36/144"
40/144"
44/144"
Code 39 Parameters n5, n6, and n7
Together, parameters n5 through n7 are used to calculate the maximum width of Code 39
characters and the start and stop characters by means of the following equation:
[(n5 x 5) + n6 + 3 + A]/144"
The value of A is determined by n6 and n7:
Code 39 Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 0: print readable characters in Utility mode
n8 = 1: print readable characters in NLQ mode
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
103
Print Code 39 Bar Code Command
The command for printing Code 39 bar codes is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. If you
wish to include a check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the
data.
Code 128 Bar Code Commands
Code 128 has 128 different characters, each of which can have any one of three different
meanings, depending on which code set is engaged:
Table 72: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command —
Usable Characters for Code Sets (9-Pin Printers)
Code Set
A
B
C
ASCII
NUL to '
DC3 to DLE
0 to 9
Characters
Dec
Hex
0 to 96
00 to 60
25 to 127 19 to 7F
48 to 57
30 to 39, in 2-digit pairs
A special code at the beginning indicates which set is engaged: three shift codes are also
available for use within the bar code to indicate a change in the code set engaged.
Select Code 128 Bar Code Command
The command for selecting Code 128 is
ESC DLE A m 4 0 n3 n4 n5 0 0 n8
Which set will be engaged is entered using the Print Code 128 Bar Code Command described
below.
Code 128 Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in 6/72", as calculated by the equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 6/72"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
104
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Code 128 Parameter n5
This parameter sets the maximum width of one character in 1/144" increments as follows:
Table 73: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command —
Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
30/144"
45/144"
58/144"
71/144"
84/144"
97/144"
110/144"
When calculating the width of the printout, you must take into consideration the Start and Stop
Code patterns:
Table 74: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command —
Start and Stop Codes for Parameter n5 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start Code
30/144"
45/144"
58/144"
71/144"
84/144"
97/144"
110/144"
Stop Code
32/144"
45/144"
58/144"
71/144"
84/144"
97/144"
110/144"
Code 128 Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print Code 128 Bar Code Command
The command for printing Code 128 bar codes is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. To
indicate which code set to use, use the set letter as the first digit of the data within the
command.
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
105
Each set has a different check digit.
Table 75: IBM/Epson Print Code 128 Command —
Check Digits for Code 128 Code Sets (9-Pin Printers)
Code Set
A
B
C
Check Digit
ASCII Dec Hex
g
103
67
CAN
24
18
@
64
40
Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Commands
Interleaved 2 of 5 bar coding is used mainly in the distribution industry. Two digits are
encoded: one in the bars and one in the spaces. Ten characters are encoded, each any ASCII
character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec, 30 to 39 Hex).
The sum of the black bars and spaces becomes the maximum width of two characters.
Select Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Command
The command for selecting Interleaved 2 of 5 is
ESC DLE A m 3 0 n3 n4 n5 n6 n7 n8
Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in 6/72", as calculated by the equation
(n3 x 10) + n4] x 6/72"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter n5
Parameter n5 is used in combination with parameter n7 to set the width of one character of the
black bars, as follows:
Table 76: IBM/Epson Select Interleaved 2 of 5 Command —
Black Bar Width for Parameter n5, n7 Values (9-Pin Printers)
n7 = 1
n7 = 2
n7 = 3
n7 = 4
n7 = 5
n7 = 6
n7 = 7
106
n5 = 1
11/144"
13/144"
15/144"
17/144"
21/144"
23/144"
25/144"
n5 = 2
18/144"
20/144"
24/144"
28/144"
32/144"
34/144"
38/144"
n5 = 3
25/144"
29/144"
33/144"
37/144"
43/144"
47/144"
51/144"
n5 = 4
32/144"
36/144"
42/144"
48/144"
54/144"
58/144"
64/144"
n5 = 5
39/144"
45/144"
51/144"
57/144"
65/144"
71/144"
77/144"
n5 = 6
46/144"
52/144"
60/144"
68/144"
76/144"
82/144"
90/144"
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
n5 = 7
53/144"
61/144"
69/144"
77/144"
87/144"
95/144"
103/144"
Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter n6
Parameter n6 is used in combination with parameter n7 to set the width of one character of the
spaces, as follows:
Table 77: IBM/Epson Select Interleaved 2 of 5 Command —
Space Widths for Parameter n6, n7 Values (9-Pin Printers)
n7 = 1
n7 = 2
n7 = 3
n7 = 4
n7 = 5
n7 = 6
n7 = 7
n6 = 1
26/144"
28/144"
30/144"
32/144"
36/144"
38/144"
40/144"
n6 = 2
33/144"
35/144"
39/144"
43/144"
47/144"
51/144"
53/144"
n6 = 3
40/144"
44/144"
48/144"
52/144"
68/144"
62/144"
66/144"
n6 = 4
47/144"
51/144"
57/144"
63/144"
69144"
75/144"
79/144"
n6 = 5
54/144"
60/144"
66/144"
72/144"
80/144"
86/144"
92/144"
n6 = 6
61/144"
67/144"
75/144"
83/144"
91/144"
99/144"
105/144"
n6 = 7
68/144"
76/144"
84/144"
92/144"
102/144"
110/144"
118/144"
Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Command
The command for printing Interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. If you
wish to include a check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the
data.
UPC A Bar Code Commands
UPC bar coding is used in the supermarket industry. UPC A coding contains twelve digits: the
first six digits represent the manufacturer, the second six digits identify the product. The digits
can be any ASCII character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec, 30 to 39 Hex).
Select UPC A Bar Code Command
The command for selecting UPC A is
ESC DLE A m 1 0 n3 n4 n5 0 0 n8
UPC A Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in units of 6/72", as calculated by the
equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 6/72"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
UPC A Parameter n5
This parameter sets the maximum width of one character in 1/144" increments as follows:
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
107
Table 78: IBM/Epson Select UPC A Command —
Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
19/144"
26/144"
33/144"
40/144"
47/144"
54/144"
61/144"
When calculating the width of the printout, you must take into consideration the Start Code
pattern, the Center bar pattern, and the Stop Code pattern as shown in the table which follows.
Table 79: IBM/Epson Select UPC A Command —
Start/Stop Codes and Center Bar Widths for Parameter n5 Values (9-Pin
Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start Code
6/144"
9/144"
12/144"
15/144"
18/144"
21/144"
24/144"
Center Bar
14/144"
19/144"
24/144"
29/144"
34/144"
39/144"
44/144"
Stop Code
6/144"
9/144"
12/144"
15/144"
18/144"
21/144"
24/144"
UPC A Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print UPC A Bar Code Command
The command for printing a UPC A bar code is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. If you
wish to include a check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the
data.
108
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
UPC E Bar Code Commands
UPC E bar coding is a six-digit variation of UPC A, used for labeling small items. The digits can
be any ASCII character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec, 30 to 39 Hex).
Select UPC E Bar Code Command
The command for selecting UPC E is
ESC DLE A m 1 4 n3 n4 n5 0 0 n8
UPC E Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in units of 6/72", as calculated by the
equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 6/72"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
UPC E Parameter n5
This parameter sets the maximum width of one character in 1/144" increments as follows:
Table 80: IBM/Epson Select UPC E Command —
Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
19/144"
26/144"
33/144"
40/144"
47/144"
54/144"
61/144"
When calculating the width of the printout, you must take into consideration the Start Code
and Stop Code patterns as shown in the table which follows.
Table 81: IBM/Epson Select UPC E Command —
Start and Stop Codes for Parameter n5 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start Code
6/144"
9/144"
12/144"
15/144"
18/144"
21/144"
24/144"
Stop Code
15/144"
21/144"
27/144"
33/144"
39/144"
45/144"
51/144"
UPC E Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
109
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print UPC E Bar Code Command
The command for printing a UPC E bar code is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. A check digit
cannot be used with UPC E bar codes.
EAN 8 Bar Code Command s
EAN bar coding is a variation of UPC coding. EAN 8 encodes eight digits. The digits can be any
ASCII character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec, 30 to 39 Hex).
Select EAN 8 Bar Code Command
The command for selecting EAN 8 is
ESC DLE A m 0 1 n3 n4 n5 0 0 n8
EAN 8 Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in 6/72", as calculated by the equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 6/72"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
EAN 8 Parameter n5
This parameter sets the maximum width of one character in 1/144" increments as follows:
Table 82: IBM/Epson Select EAN 8 Command —
Maximum Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
19/144"
26/144"
33/144"
40/144"
47/144"
54/144"
61/144"
When calculating the width of the printout, you must take into consideration the left hand
guard pattern, the center guard pattern and the right hand guard pattern.
EAN 8 Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
110
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Print EAN 8 Bar Code Command
The command for printing an EAN 8 bar code is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. If you
wish to include a check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the
data.
EAN 13 Bar Code Commands
EAN 13 encodes 13 digits and contains the same number of bars as UPC A. The thirteenth digit
combined with the twelfth digit provides a code representing a country. The digits can be any
ASCII character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec, 30 to 39 Hex).
Select EAN 13 Bar Code Command
The command for selecting EAN 13 is
ESC DLE A m 0 2 n3 n4 n5 0 0 n8
EAN 13 Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in 6/72", as calculated by the equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 6/72"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
EAN 13 Parameter n5
This parameter sets the maximum width of one character in 1/144" increments as follows:
Table 83: IBM/Epson Select EAN 13 Command —
Maximum Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values (9-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
19/144"
26/144"
33/144"
40/144"
47/144"
54/144"
61/144"
When calculating the width of the printout, you must take into consideration the left hand
guard pattern, the center guard pattern and the right hand guard pattern.
EAN 13 Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print EAN 13 Bar Code Command
The command for printing EAN 13 bar codes is
ESC DLE B m [data]
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
111
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. If you
wish to include a check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the
data.
Postnet Bar Code Command
Postnet bar coding is used by the United States Post Office for sorting mail by automated
equipment. It incorporates a coding system using five bars and four spaces for each digit.
Select/Print Postnet Bar Code Data Command
The command
ESC DLE C P1 [data]
selects Postnet bar codes and initiates the printing of the zip code + 4 data which you enter as
part of the command. Each digit of data can be any ASCII character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec,
30 to 39 Hex). The data must be the full ZIP + 4 code.
Postnet Parameter P1
Parameter P1 tells the printer how many bytes of bar code data to expect. Its value can be any
ASCII character from NUL to DC4 (1 to 20 Dec, 01 to 14 Hex): any values for P1 outside this
range will cause the data to be ignored.
The print density for Postnet bar codes will be 240 dpi. Printing is accomplished in two print
passes with a 1/144" line feed. The bar height will be as follows:
High Bar: 16/144" (eight dots in two passes)
Low Bar: 6/144" (three dots in two passes)
To include the check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the data.
112
Chapter 10: Bar Code Commands for 9-Pin Printers
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
24-pin models ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo, ML590 and ML591 incorporate eight bar codes, in
both the Epson LQ and IBM emulations:
• Code 39
• UPC* E
• Code 128
• EAN** 8
• Interleaved 2 of 5
• EAN** 13
• UPC* A
• Postnet
*UPC = Universal Product Code
**EAN = European Article Numbering
These commands are the same as those given in Chapter 10 for the 9-pin printers; however, the
values for the various parameters are different for the 9-pin printers.
Bar Code Commands
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
Select Bar Code
Type
and Size
Print Bar Code Data
Print Postnet Bar
Code Data
⻬ ML590, ML591
ASCII
ESC DLE A m
n1 ... n8
Dec
27 16 65 m
n1 ... n8
Hex
1B 10 41 m
n1 ... n8
ESC DLE B m n
[data]
ESC DLE C P1 [data]
27 16 66 m n
[data]
27 16 67 P1 [data]
1B 10 42 m n
[data]
1B 10 43 P1 [data]
To print bar codes other than Postnet, you must enter two commands:
•
Select Bar Code Type & Size
•
Print Bar Code Data (provides data and initiates printing)
To print Postnet bar codes, use the command ESC DLE C P1 [data] discussed at the end of this
chapter.
Code 39 Bar Code Command s
Also known as 3 of 9 Code, Code 39 is used in non-retail applications. Each character has five
bars and four spaces. Code patterns have been developed for 44 different alphabetic, numeric
and graphic characters. The digits can be any ASCII character from SP to Z (32 to 102 Dec, 20
to 66 Hex).
Select Code 39 Bar Code Command
The command for selecting Code 39 is
ESC DLE A m 2 0 n3 n4 n5 n6 n7 n8
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
113
Code 39 Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in units of 15/180", as calculated by the
equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 15/180"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
Code 39 Parameter n5
This parameter sets the width of the narrow bars in 1/360" increments.
Table 84: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command —
Narrow Bar Widths for Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
2/360"
4/360"
7/360"
9/360"
12/360"
14/360"
17/360"
Code 39 Parameter n6
This parameter sets the width of the narrow space characters in 1/360" increments.
Table 85: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command —
Narrow Space Widths for Parameter n6 Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of n6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
114
Character Width
8/360"
10/360"
13/360"
15/360"
18/360"
20/360"
23/360"
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Code 39 Parameter n7
Parameter n7 is used in combination with parameters n5 and n6 to set the width of the wide bars
and the wide spaces.
Table 86: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command —
Wide Bar Widths for Parameter n5, n7 Values (24-Pin Printers)
n7 = 1
n7 = 2
n7 = 3
n7 = 4
n7 = 5
n7 = 6
n7 = 7
n5 = 1
7/360"
9/360"
12/360"
14/360"
17/360"
19/360"
22/360"
n5 = 2
11/360"
14/360"
18/360"
21/360"
25/360"
28/360"
32/360"
n5 = 3
17/360"
22/360"
27/360"
32/360"
36/360"
41/360"
47/360"
n5 = 4
21/360"
27/360"
33/360"
39/360"
45/360"
51/360"
57/360"
n5 = 5
27/360"
32/360"
42/360"
49/360"
57/360"
64/360"
72/360"
n5 = 6
31/360"
39/360"
48/360"
56/360"
65/360"
73/360"
82/360"
n5 = 7
37/360"
47/360"
57/360"
67/360"
77/360"
87/360"
97/360"
Table 87: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command —
Wide Space Widths for Parameter n6, n7 Values (24-Pin Printers)
n7 = 1
n7 = 2
n7 = 3
n7 = 4
n7 = 5
n7 = 6
n7 = 7
n6 = 1
13/360"
16/360"
18/360"
21/360"
23/360"
26/360"
28/360"
n6 = 2
17/360"
21/360"
24/360"
28/360"
31/360"
35/360"
38/360"
n6 = 3
23/360"
28/360"
33/360"
38/360"
43/360"
48/360"
53/360"
n6 = 4
27/360"
33/360"
39/360"
45/360"
51/360"
57/360"
63/360"
n6 = 5
33/360"
41/360"
48/360"
56/360"
63/360"
71/360"
78/360"
n6 = 6
37/360"
46/360"
54/360"
63/360"
71/360"
80/360"
88/360"
n6 = 7
43/360"
53/360"
63/360"
73/360"
80/360"
93/360"
103/360"
Code 39 Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print Code 39 Bar Code Command
The command for printing Code 39 bar codes is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. If you
wish to include a check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the
data.
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
115
Code 128 Bar Code Commands
Code 128 has 106 different characters, each of which can have any one of three different
meanings depending on which code set is engaged:
Table 88: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command —
Characters for Each Code Set (24-Pin Printers)
Code Set
A
B
C
Characters
ASCII
NUL to '
DC3 to DLE
0 to 9
Dec
0 to 96
25 to 127
48 to 57
Hex
00 to 60
19 to 7F
30 to 39, in 2-digit pairs
A special code at the beginning indicates which set is engaged: three shift codes are also
available for use within the bar code to indicate a change in the code set engaged.
Select Code 128 Bar Code Command
The command for selecting Code 128 is
ESC DLE A m 4 0 n3 n4 n5 0 0 n8
Which set will be engaged is entered using the Print Code 128 Bar Code Command described
below.
Code 128 Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in units of 15/180", as calculated by the
equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 15/180"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
Code 128 Parameter n5
This parameter sets the maximum width of one character in 1/360" increments as follows:
Table 89: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command —
Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
116
Character Width
55/360"
77/360"
110/360"
132/360"
165/360"
187/360"
220/360"
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
When calculating the width of the printout, you must take into consideration the Start and Stop
Code patterns:
Table 90: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command —
Start and Stop Codes for Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start Code
55/360"
77/360"
110/360"
132/360"
165/360"
187/360"
220/360"
Stop Code
62/360"
88/360"
127/360"
153/360"
192/360"
218/360"
257/360"
Code 128 Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print Code 128 Bar Code Command
The command for printing Code 128 bar codes is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. To
indicate which set to use (A, B, or C), use the set letter as the first digit of the data within the
command.
Each set has a different check digit.
Table 91: IBM/Epson Print Code 128 Command — Check Digits (24-Pin
Printers)
Code Set
A
B
C
Check Digit
ASCII Dec Hex
g
103
67
CAN
24
18
@
64
40
Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Commands
Interleaved 2 of 5 bar coding is used mainly in the distribution industry. Two digits are
encoded: one in the bars and one in the spaces. Ten characters are encoded, each any ASCII
character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec, 30 to 39 Hex).
The sum of the black bars and spaces becomes the maximum width of two characters.
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
117
Select Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Command
The command for selecting Interleaved 2 of 5 is
ESC DLE A m 3 0 n3 n4 n5 n6 n7 n8
Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in units of 15/180", as calculated by the
equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 15/180"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter n5
Parameter n5 is used in combination with parameter n7 to set the width of one character of the
black bars, as follows:
Table 92: IBM/Epson Select Interleaved 2 of 5 Command —
Black Bar Widths for Parameter n5, n7 Values (24-Pin Printers)
n7 = 1
n7 = 2
n7 = 3
n7 = 4
n7 = 5
n7 = 6
n7 = 7
n5 = 1
20/360"
24/360"
30/360"
34/360"
40/360"
44/360"
50/360"
n5 = 2
34/360"
40/360"
48/360"
54/360"
62/360"
68/360"
76/360"
n5 = 3
55/360"
65/360"
75/360"
85/360"
93/360"
103/360"
115/360"
n5 = 4
69/360"
81/360"
93/360"
105/360"
117/360"
129/360"
141/360"
n5 = 5
90/360"
100/360"
120/360"
134/360"
150/360"
164/360"
180/360"
n5 = 6
184/360"
120/360"
138/360"
154/360"
172/360"
188/360"
206/360"
n5 = 7
125/360"
145/360"
165/360"
185/360"
205/360"
225/360"
245/360"
Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter n6
Parameter n6 is used in combination with parameter n7 to set the width of one character of the
spaces, as follows:
Table 93: IBM/Epson Select Interleaved 2 of 5 Command —
Space Widths for Parameter n6 n7 Values (24-Pin Printers)
n7 = 1
n7 = 2
n7 = 3
n7 = 4
n7 = 5
n7 = 6
n7 = 7
118
n6 = 1
50/360"
56/360"
60/360"
66/360"
70/360"
76/360"
80/360"
n6 = 2
64/360"
72/360"
78/360"
86/360"
92/360"
100/360"
106/360"
n6 = 3
85/360"
95/360"
105/360"
115/360"
125/360"
135/360"
146/360"
n6 = 4
99/360"
111/360"
123/360"
135/360"
147/360"
159/360"
171/360"
n6 = 5
120/360"
136/360"
150/360"
166/360"
180/360"
196/360"
210/360"
n6 = 6
134/360"
152/360"
168/360"
186/360"
202/360"
220/360"
236/360"
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
n6 = 7
155/360"
175/360"
195/360"
215/360"
235/360"
255/360"
275/360"
Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code Command
The command for printing Interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. If you
wish to include a check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the
data.
UPC A Bar Code Commands
UPC bar coding is used in the supermarket industry. UPC A coding contains twelve digits: the
first six digits represent the manufacturer, the second six digits identify the product. The digits
can be any ASCII character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec, 30 to 39 Hex).
Select UPC A Bar Code Command
The command for selecting UPC A is
ESC DLE A m 1 0 n3 n4 n5 0 0 n8
UPC A Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in units of 15/180", as calculated by the
equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 15/180"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
UPC A Parameter n5
This parameter sets the maximum width of one character in 1/360" increments as follows:
Table 94: IBM/Epson Select UPC A Command —
Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
35/360"
49/360"
70/360"
84/360"
105/360"
119/360"
140/360"
When calculating the width of the printout, you must take into consideration the Start Code
pattern, the Center bar pattern, and the Stop Code pattern as shown in the table which follows.
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
119
Table 95: IBM/Epson Select UPC A Command —
Start/Stop Codes and Center Bars for Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start Code
12/360"
18/360"
27/360"
33/360"
42/360"
48/360"
57/360"
Center Bar
28/360"
38/360"
53/360"
63/360"
78/360"
88/360"
103/360"
Stop Code
12/360"
18/360"
27/360"
33/360"
42/360"
48/360"
57/360"
UPC A Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print UPC A Bar Code Command
The command for printing a UPC A bar code is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. If you
wish to include a check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the
data.
UPC E Bar Code Commands
UPC E bar coding is a six-digit variation of UPC A, used for labeling small items. The digits can
be any ASCII character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec, 30 to 39 Hex).
Select UPC E Bar Code Command
The command for selecting UPC E is
ESC DLE A m 1 4 n3 n4 n5 0 0 n8
UPC E Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in units of 15/180", as calculated by the
equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 15/180"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
120
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
UPC E Parameter n5
This parameter sets the maximum width of one character in 1/360" increments as follows:
Table 96: IBM/Epson Select UPC E Command —
Maximum Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
35/360"
49/360"
70/360"
84/360"
105/360"
119/360"
140/360"
When calculating the width of the printout, you must take into consideration the Start Code
and Stop Code patterns as shown in the table which follows.
UPC E Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print UPC E Bar Code Command
The command for printing a UPC E bar code is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. A check digit
cannot be used with UPC E bar codes.
EAN 8 Bar Code Commands
EAN bar coding is a variation of UPC coding. EAN 8 encodes eight digits. The digits can be any
ASCII character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec, 30 to 39 Hex).
Select EAN 8 Bar Code Command
The command for selecting EAN 8 is
ESC DLE A m 0 1 n3 n4 n5 0 0 n8
EAN 8 Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in units of 15/180", as calculated by the
equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 15/180"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
EAN 8 Parameter n5
This parameter sets the maximum width of one character in 1/360" increments as follows:
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
121
Table 97: IBM/Epson Select EAN 8 Command —
Maximum Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
35/360"
49/360"
70/360"
84/360"
105/360"
119/360"
140/360"
When calculating the width of the printout, you must take into consideration the left hand
guard pattern, the center guard pattern and the right hand guard pattern.
EAN 8 Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print EAN 8 Bar Code Command
The command for printing an EAN 8 bar code is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. If you
wish to include a check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the
data.
EAN 13 Bar Code Commands
EAN 13 encodes 13 digits and contains the same number of bars as UPC A. The thirteenth digit
combined with the twelfth digit provides a code representing a country. The digits can be any
ASCII character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec, 30 to 39 Hex).
122
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Select EAN 13 Bar Code Command
The command for selecting EAN 13 is
ESC DLE A m 0 2 n3 n4 n5 0 0 n8
EAN 13 Parameters n3 and n4
These parameters set the vertical length of the bars in units of 15/180", as calculated by the
equation
[(n3 x 10) + n4] x 15/180"
where the total value must be less than or equal to 25.
EAN 13 Parameter n5
This parameter sets the maximum width of one character in 1/360" increments as follows:
Table 98: IBM/Epson Select EAN 13 Command —
Maximum Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers)
Value of n5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Width
35/360"
49/360"
70/360"
84/360"
105/360"
119/360"
140/360"
When calculating the width of the printout, you must take into consideration the left hand
guard pattern, the center guard pattern and the right hand guard pattern.
EAN 13 Parameter n8
This parameter sets whether or not the readable characters are printed.
n8 = 1: print readable characters
n8 = 0: do not print readable characters
Print EAN 13 Bar Code Command
The command for printing EAN 13 bar codes is
ESC DLE B m [data]
where parameter m designates the number of characters which will follow in the data. If you
wish to include a check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the
data.
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
123
Postnet Bar Code Command
Postnet bar coding is used by the United States Post Office for sorting mail by automated
equipment. It incorporates a coding system using five bars and four spaces for each digit.
Select/Print Postnet Bar Code Data Command
The command
ESC DLE C P1 [data]
selects Postnet bar codes and initiates the printing of the zip code + 4 data which you enter as
part of the command. Each digit of data can be any ASCII character from 0 to 9 (48 to 57 Dec,
30 to 39 Hex). The data must be the full ZIP + 4 code.
Postnet Parameter P1
Parameter P1 tells the printer how many bytes of bar code data to expect. Its value can be any
ASCII character from NUL to DC4 (1 to 20 Dec, 01 to 14 Hex): any values for P1 outside this
range will cause the data to be ignored.
The print density for Postnet bar codes will be 240 dpi. Printing is accomplished in two print
passes with a 1/144" line feed. The bar height will be as follows:
High Bar: 16/144" (eight dots in two passes)
Low Bar: 6/144" (three dots in two passes)
To include the check digit, enter the ASCII character @ (64 Dec, 40 Hex) at the end of the data.
124
Chapter 11: Bar Code Commands for 24-Pin Printers
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands
This chapter describes the following commands:
• Cancel Command
• Paper-Out Sensor Commands
• Change Emulation Command
• Print Suppress Mode Commands
• Cut Sheet Feeder Commands
• Select Color Command
• Delete Command
• Set Unit Command
• Half-Speed Printing Command
• Software I-Prime Command
• Initialize Printer Commands
• Stop Printing Command
• Most Significant Bit Commands
Cancel Command (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321 Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Cancel
CAN
24
18
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
This command clears all the data from the print buffer, but does not reset printing features that
have been set using control codes.
Change Emulation Command (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Change Emulation
ESC { n
27 123 n
1B 7B n
⻬ ML520, ML521
This command allows you to change the emulation as follows:
Table 99: IBM/E/ML ESC { Command —
Emulations for n Values
Decimal Value of n
2
33
65
Emulation
IBM Proprinter III
OKIDATA MICROLINE Standard
Epson
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands
125
Appendix A: Interfacing
This appendix gives the pin assignments for the parallel and serial interfaces of MICROLINE
printers. It also includes the most common serial cable configurations.
Parallel Interface
Note: The parallel cable should be no longer than 6 ft. (1.8m). The cable must be shielded in
order to comply with FCC requirements.
Table 102: Pin Assignments for Parallel Interface Signals
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14†
15
16
17
18†
19-30
31†
32
33
34-35
Signal
Strobe
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Data 8
Acknowledge
Busy
Paper end
Select
Autofeed
Not used
0V
Chassis Ground
+5V*
0V
I-Prime
Fault
0V
Not used
Return Pin
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
No return
–
–
No return
No return
–
–
–
–
–
–
Direction
To Printer
To Printer
To Printer
To Printer
To Printer
To Printer
To Printer
To Printer
To Printer
From Printer
From Printer
From Printer
From Printer
To Printer
–
Signal Ground
Frame Ground
From Printer
Ground
To Printer
From Printer
Signal Ground
–
† Pins controlled by jumper plugs in the printer.
* 50 mA maximum.
Appendix A: Interfacing
133
Serial Interface
See your Printer Handbook for serial menu settings
Note: The serial cable should be no longer than 50 ft. (15.25m). The cable must be shielded in
order to comply with FCC requirements.
Table 103: Pin Assignments for Serial Interface Signals
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8–10
11
12–19
20
21–25
134
Signal
Protective Ground
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request to Send
Not used
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Not used
Supervisory Send Data
Not used
Data Terminal Ready
Not used
Symbol
PG
TD
RD
TRS
–
DSR
SG
–
SSD
–
DTR
–
Appendix A: Interfacing
Direction
–
From Printer
To Printer
From Printer
–
To Printer
–
–
From Printer
–
From Printer
–
Commonly Used Serial Cable Configurations
IBM 25-Pin Cable Configuration
Computer
Printer
PG 1
TD 2
RD 3
CTS 5
DSR 6
1 PG
3 RD
2 TD
11 SSD
20 DTR
6 DSR
7 SG
4 RTS
5 CTS
SG 7
IBM 9-Pin Cable Configuration
Computer
RD 2
TD 3
SG 5
DSR 6
CTS 8
Printer
2 TD
3 RD
7 SG
20 DTR
6 DSR
11 SSD
4 RTS
5 CTS
Appendix A: Interfacing
135
136
Appendix A: Interfacing
Cut Sheet Feeder (CSF) Commands
CSF Commands (IBM/E)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Insert Sheet
ESC EM I
27 25 73
1B 19 49
Eject Sheet
ESC EM R
27 25 82
1B 19 52
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
The insert page command feeds a sheet of paper from the cut sheet feeder (CSF) to the top of
form position. If CSF paper is already in the printer, the printer will eject the page and load
another.
The eject page command prints data in the print buffer and ejects the page. A line feed code
(LF) at the end of the page causes the next page to feed into the printer automatically.
Bin Select Command for Dual-Bin CSF (IBM/E)
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Select Bin 1
ESC EM 1
27 25 49
1B 19 31
Select Bin 2
ESC EM 2
27 25 50
1B 19 32
The bin select command chooses the active bin when the optional dual-bin cut sheet feeder is
installed.
CSF Commands (ML)
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Insert Sheet
ESC S
27 83
1B 53
Eject Sheet
ESC V
27 86
1B 56
⻬ ML520, ML521
The insert page command feeds a sheet of paper from the cut sheet feeder (CSF) to the top of
form position. If CSF paper is already in the printer, the printer will eject the page and load
another.
The eject page command prints data in the print buffer and ejects the page. A line feed code
(LF) at the end of the page causes the next page to feed into the printer automatically.
126
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands
Delete Command (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Delete One Character Command
DEL
127
7F
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
This command deletes the last character sent to the printer. It will not delete graphics data.
Half-Speed Printing Commands (E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
IBM
Epson
ML
Half-Speed Printing On
Not applicable
ASCII: ESC s 1
Dec: 27 115 49
Hex: 1B 73 31
ASCII: ESC <
Dec: 27 60
Hex: 1B 3C
Half-Speed Printing Off
Not applicable
ASCII: ESC s 0
Dec: 27 115 48
Hex: 1B 73 30
ASCII: ESC >
Dec: 27 62
Hex: 1B 3E
This command controls the speed of printing. Half-speed printing is quieter than full speed.
Initialize Printer Commands (E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
IBM
Epson
ML
Initialize Printer
Not applicable
ASCII: ESC @
Dec: 27 64
Hex: 1B 40
ASCII: ESC CAN
Dec: 27 24
Hex: 1B 18
These commands remove any data in the printer's buffer and return the printer to the current
menu settings. They will override any features set on the printer's front panel or through
previous commands. Also known as the initialize printer or reset commands.
Note: In order for this command to be effective, the Reset Inhibit item in the printer Menu
must be set to NO (the factory default). If the setting has been changed to YES, this
command will be ignored.
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands
127
Most Significant Bit Commands (Epson)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391Turbo
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Set Most Significant Bit (MSB) to Zero
ESC =
27 61
1B 3D
Set MSB to 1
ESC >
27 62
1B 3E
Cancel MSB Control
ESC #
27 35
1B 23
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
The ESC = command sets the most significant bit (MSB) of an 8-bit data input to zero. The ESC
> command sets the MSB to one. The ESC # command cancels the MSB control established by
either command and all data is interpreted exactly as sent from the computer.
Paper-Out Sensor Commands (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
IBM
Epson
ML
Paper-Out Sensor On
ASCII: ESC 9
Dec: 27 57
Hex: 1B 39
ASCII: ESC 9
Dec: 27 57
Hex: 1B 39
ASCII: ESC E 0
Dec: 27 69 48
Hex: 1B 45 30
Paper-Out Sensor Off
ASCII: ESC 8
Dec: 27 56
Hex: 1B 38
ASCII: ESC 8
Dec: 27 56
Hex: 1B 38
ASCII: ESC E 1
Dec: 27 69 49
Hex: 1B 45 31
The paper-out sensor detects when less than one inch of paper remains (0.5-inch for
ML390/391T printers). When this happens, the alarm light goes on and the printer is
deselected. This command overrides the sensor so that you can print closer to the bottom of the
page. (The feature is also menu selectable.) Be careful if you use this feature, since it lets the
printer continue printing when there's no more paper. This can cause loss of data and may
damage the printhead.
128
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands
Print Suppress Mode Commands
Print Suppress Mode On/Off Commands (IBM)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ML320 E/I,
ML320T, ML520
ML321 E/I, ML321T,
ML521
ML390T, ML590
ML391T, ML591
Print
Suppress
Mode On
ASCII: ESC Q ETX
Dec: 27 81 3
Hex: 1B 51 03
ASCII: ESC Q SYN
Dec: 27 81 22
Hex: 1B 51 16
ASCII: ESC Q $
Dec: 27 81 36
Hex: 1B 51 24
ASCII: ESC Q #
Dec: 27 81 35
Hex: 1B 51 23
Print
Suppress
Mode Off
ASCII: DC1
Dec: 17
Hex: 11
ASCII: DC1
Dec: 17
Hex: 11
ASCII: DC1
Dec: 17
Hex: 11
ASCII: DC1
Dec: 17
Hex: 11
When the printer receives the command to begin Print Suppress mode, it ignores all data until
it receives the DC1 code. This means that any data will be lost. The SEL light blinks when the
printer is in the Print Suppress mode. These commands will only work if the Print Suppress
Effective item in the printer menu is set to Yes (the factory default).
Print Suppress Mode On/Off Commands (E/ML)
⻬ ML320 E/I, ML321 E/I
⻬ ML320 Std., ML321 Std.
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391Turbo
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Print Suppress Mode On
DC3
19
13
Print Suppress Mode Off
DC1
17
11
⻬ ML590, ML591
⻬ ML520, ML521
When the printer receives the command to begin Print Suppress mode, it ignores all data until
it receives the DC1 code. This means that any data will be lost. The SEL light blinks when the
printer is in the Print Suppress mode. These commands will only work if the Print Suppress
Effective item in the printer menu is set to Yes (the factory default).
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands
129
Select Color Command (IBM/E)
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Select Color
ESC r n
27 114 n
1B 72 n
This command selects the color that will print when the printer has a color ribbon installed and
the menu is set to any setting other than “Black Ribbon.”
Table 100: IBM/Epson ESC r Command —
Color Selections for n Values
Value of n
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Color
Black
Magenta
Cyan (blue)
Violet
Yellow
Orange
Green
Set Unit Command (Epson)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391 Turbo
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Set Increment of
Movement
ESC ( U Ln Hn Pn
27 40 85 Ln Hn Pn
1B 28 55 Ln Hn Pn
This command is used to set the increment of movement used in conjunction with the
following commands:
130
ESC ( c Ln Hn Lt Ht Lb Hb
Set Page Format (see Chapter 9)
ESC ( C 2 0 Lp Hp
Set Page Length in Defined Unit (see Chapter 9)
ESC \ Ln Hn
Set Relative Horizontal Dot Position (see Chapter 8)
ESC ( V Ln Hn Lp Hp
Set Absolute Vertical Position (see Chapter 9)
ESC ( v Ln Hn Lp Hp
Set Relative Vertical Position (see Chapter 9)
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands
Parameters Ln and Hn
Parameters Ln and Hn are used to designate the quantity of data, as follows:
Ln + (Hn x 256)
Parameter Pn
Parameter Pn sets the increment of movement. It can have any value from 0 to 255.
Table 101: Epson ESC ( U Command —
Increments of Movement for Pn Values
Pn
0 to 9
10 to 19
20 to 29
30 to 39
40 to 49
50 to 59
60 to 69
70 to 255
Increment
Unchanged
1/360"
11/80"
1/120"
1/90"
1/72"
1/60"
Unchanged
Software I-Prime Command (IBM/E/ML)
⻬ ML320 Turbo, ML321Turbo
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391Turbo
⻬ ML520, ML521
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Software I-Prime
ESC } NUL
27 125 0
1B 7D 00
This command clears the print buffer and resets the printer to the default settings, regardless of
the setting for the Reset Inhibit item in the printer menu.
If the Cut Sheet Feeder (CSF) is installed, this command will also eject any paper loaded into
the printer from the CSF.
Stop Printing Command (IBM)
⻬ ML390 Turbo, ML391Turbo
⻬ ML590, ML591
Function
ASCII
Dec
Hex
Stop Printing (Deselect)
ESC j
27 106
1B 6A
This command deselects the printer so that it will stop printing. To resume printing, press the
SEL switch, or–if “Auto Select” is set to “Yes” in the menu–reload paper.
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands
131
132
Chapter 12: Miscellaneous Commands
Appendix B: Listing of Tables
Table 1: Printer Drivers for ML320 Epson/IBM & ML321 Epson/IBM ......................................... 1
Table 2: Printer Drivers for ML320 MICROLINE Standard & ML321 MICROLINE Standard ...... 1
Table 3: Printer Drivers for Models ML320 Turbo & ML321 Turbo............................................ 1
Table 4: Printer Drivers for Models ML390 Turbo & ML391 Turbo............................................ 1
Table 5: Printer Drivers for Models ML520 & ML521 ................................................................ 2
Table 6: Printer Drivers for Models ML590 & ML591 ................................................................ 2
Table 7: Available Drivers.......................................................................................................... 3
Table 8: IBM/ML ESC ! Command — International Character Substitutions............................... 9
Table 9: Epson ESC R Command — International Character Substitutions ............................... 10
Table 10: Epson ESC R Command — Code Page Selections for ML390/391Turbo................... 10
Table 11: IBM/ML ESC [ T Command — Code Page Parameters.............................................. 11
Table 12: Epson 9-Pin ESC ( t Command — Code Page Set for Pn1, Pn2 Values ......................... 12
Table 13: Epson 24-Pin ESC ( t Command — Code Page Set for Pn1, Pn2 Values ....................... 14
Table 14: Pitch Setting Commands — Characters per Line (CPL) for Pitches............................ 15
Table 15: Epson ESC X Command — Font Substitution for Models ML590 & ML591.............. 17
Table 16: Epson ESC X Command — Character Pitch Settings for Pn Values ............................ 18
Table 17: Epson ESC X Command — Point Sizes for Np Values ............................................... 18
Table 18: IBM ESC [ @ Command — Character Height/Line Spacing for n1 Values ................. 22
Table 19: IBM ESC [ @ Command — Character Width for n2 Values ....................................... 22
Table 20: IBM ESC { @ Command — Character Height/Line Spacing for m3 Values ................ 23
Table 20a: IBM ESC { @ Command — Character Width for m4 Values .................................... 23
Table 21: ML ESC & Command — Print Features for n1, n2, n3 and n4 Values .......................... 24
Table 22: ML ESC & Command — Variable Factors for n1, n2, n3, n4 ........................................ 24
Table 23: IBM ESC V and ESC SP & Epson ESC SP Commands — Character Spacing
(in Inches)................................................................................................................ 26
Table 24: ML ESC N Command — Character Spacing (in Inches)............................................ 27
Table 25: IBM/Epson ESC k Command — Fonts for n Values................................................... 30
Table 26: IBM ESC I Command — Print Modes Corresponding to n Values for All
9-Pin Models ........................................................................................................... 31
Table 27: IBM ESC I Command — Print Modes Corresponding to n Values for 24-Pin Models
ML390T & ML391T ................................................................................................. 31
Table 28: IBM ESC I Command — Print Modes Corresponding to n Values for 24-Pin Models
ML590 & ML591 ..................................................................................................... 32
Table 29: IBM ESC [ I Command — Parameters Activated for Calculated Ln, Hn Values .......... 32
Table 30: IBM ESC [ I Command — Fonts Selected for Calculated Hfid, Lfid Values................... 33
Table 31: IBM ESC [ I Command — Character Pitch Settings for Calculated Hfwd, Lfwd Values .. 34
Table 32: Epson ESC ! Command —Print Features for n Values............................................... 35
Table 33: Epson ESC ( - Command — Score Styles for D1 and D2 Values................................. 38
Table 34: IBM ESC = Command — Character Widths for a2 Values......................................... 42
Table 35: Custom Character Commands — Character/Grid Width for Print Modes (24-Pin
Printers) .................................................................................................................. 46
Table 36: Epson ESC : Command — Fonts for n Values ........................................................... 50
Table 37: Epson ESC * m Command — 8-Pin Graphics Density Codes for m Values .............. 55
Appendix C: Listing of Tables
137
Table 38: ML ESC * Command — Densities (DPI) for n1 Values............................................... 58
Table 39: ML ESC * Command —Speed & Word Sizes for n2 Values ....................................... 59
Table 40: Epson ESC * m Command — 8-Pin Graphics Density Codes ................................... 63
Table 41: IBM ESC [ g Command — Horizontal Graphics Resolution for m Values ................ 65
Table 42: Epson ESC . Command — Valid Range of Pm Values for Pv Values ........................... 67
Table 43: Epson ESC . Command — Maximum Horizontal Dots for Ph Values ........................ 67
Table 44: IBM ESC X Command — Default Settings for Right Margin...................................... 70
Table 45: Epson ESC L and ESC Q Commands — Range of Margin Settings, All 9-Pin Printers 70
Table 46: Epson ESC L and ESC Q Commands — Range of Margin Settings, 24-Pin Models
ML390/391 Turbo ................................................................................................... 70
Table 47: Epson ESC L and ESC Q Commands — Range of Margin Settings, 24-Pin Models
ML590/591.............................................................................................................. 70
Table 48: ML ESC % C and ESC % R Commands — Maximum Margin Values ....................... 72
Table 49: IBM/Epson ESC D Command — Maximum Number of Horizontal Tab Stops.......... 73
Table 50: IBM/Epson ESC D Command — Maximum Values for Horizontal Tab Stops ........... 73
Table 51: ML ESC HT Command — Maximum Values for xnynzn ............................................. 74
Table 52: ML ESC ETX Command — Shift Increment for Character Pitches ............................ 75
Table 53: ML ESC ETX Command — XYZW Values for Setting Horizontal Tabs..................... 75
Table 54: IBM/ML ESC % B Command — Shift Increments for Left Margin Indents ................. 77
Table 55: IBM/E/ML ESC DLE @ Command — Shift Increments for 9-Pin Models ................... 78
Table 56: IBM/E/ML ESC DLE @ Command — Shift Increments for 24-Pin Models ................. 78
Table 57: IBM/E/ML ESC DLE @ Command — Maximum P1P2P3P4 Values for 9-Pin Models.... 79
Table 58: IBM/E/ML ESC DLE @ Command — Maximum P1P2P3P4 Values for 24-Pin Models.. 79
Table 59: ML ESC % F and ESC % E Commands — Movement Increments for Pitch Settings.. 81
Table 60: ML ESC ? Command — Carriage Return/Line Feed Codes for
n Values .................................................................................................................. 88
Table 61: IBM/E/ML Fine Increment Line Spacing Commands — Values of Parameter n......... 91
Table 62: IBM/Epson ESC A Command — Values of Parameter n............................................ 91
Table 63: IBM/Epson ESC 3 Command — Values of Parameter n ............................................ 92
Table 64: IBM/Epson n/360" Line Spacing Commands — Values of Parameter n..................... 93
Table 65: IBM ESC [ \ Command — Values of Parameter n..................................................... 93
Table 66: ML VFU Commands — Usable Channel Codes for Parameter n .............................. 96
Table 67: Epson ESC ( v Command — Hexadecimal Values for Lp Hp ...................................... 97
Table 68: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command — Narrow Bar Widths for Parameter n5
Values (9-Pin Printers) ........................................................................................... 102
Table 69: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command — Narrow Space Widths for Parameter n6
Values (9-Pin Printers) ........................................................................................... 102
Table 70: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command — Wide Bar Widths for Parameter n5, n6, n7
Values (9-Pin Printers) ........................................................................................... 103
Table 71: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command — Wide Space Widths for Parameter n5, n6, n7
Values (9-Pin Printers) ........................................................................................... 103
Table 72: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command — Usable Characters for Code 128 Code
Sets (9-Pin Printers)............................................................................................... 104
Table 73: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command — Character Widths for Parameter n5
Values (9-Pin Printers) ........................................................................................... 105
Table 74: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command — Start and Stop Codes for Parameter n5
138
Appendix C: Listing of Tables
Values (9-Pin Printers) ........................................................................................... 105
Table 75: IBM/Epson Print Code 128 Command — Check Digits for Code Sets (9-Pin Printers)105
Table 76: IBM/Epson Select Interleaved 2 of 5 Command — Black Bar Width for Parameter
n5, n7 Values (9-Pin Printers) .................................................................................. 106
Table 77: IBM/Epson Select Interleaved 2 of 5 Command — Space Widths for Parameter
n6, n7 Values (9-Pin Printers) .................................................................................. 106
Table 78: IBM/Epson Select UPC A Command — Character Widths for Parameter n5
Values (9-Pin Printers) ........................................................................................... 107
Table 79: IBM/Epson Select UPC A Command — Start/Stop Codes and Center Bar Widths
for Parameter n5 Values (9-Pin Printers) ................................................................. 108
Table 80: IBM/Epson Select UPC E Command — Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values
(9-Pin Printers)....................................................................................................... 109
Table 81: IBM/Epson Select UPC E Command — Start and Stop Codes for Parameter n5
Values (9-Pin Printers) ........................................................................................... 109
Table 82: IBM/Epson Select EAN 8 Command — Maximum Character Widths for Parameter
n5 Values (9-Pin Printers) ....................................................................................... 110
Table 83: IBM/Epson Select EAN 13 Command — Maximum Character Widths for Parameter
n5 Values (9-Pin Printers) ....................................................................................... 111
Table 84: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command — Narrow Bar Widths for Parameter n5
Values (24-Pin Printers) ......................................................................................... 114
Table 85: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command — Narrow Space Widths for Parameter n6
Values (24-Pin Printers) ......................................................................................... 114
Table 86: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command — Wide Bar Widths for Parameter n5, n7
Values (24-Pin Printers) ......................................................................................... 115
Table 87: IBM/Epson Select Code 39 Command — Wide Space Widths for Parameter n6, n7
Values (24-Pin Printers) ......................................................................................... 115
Table 88: I BM/Epson Select Code 128 Command — Usable Characters for Code 128 Code
Sets (24-Pin Printers)............................................................................................. 116
Table 89: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command — Character Widths for Parameter n5
Values (24-Pin Printers) ......................................................................................... 116
Table 90: IBM/Epson Select Code 128 Command — Start and Stop Codes for Parameter n5
Values (24-Pin Printers) ......................................................................................... 117
Table 91: IBM/Epson Print Code 128 Command — Check Digits (24-Pin Printers) ................ 117
Table 92: IBM/Epson Select Interleaved 2 of 3 Command — Black Bar Widths for
Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers) .................................................................... 118
Table 93: IBM/Epson Select Interleaved 2 of 3 Command — Space Widths for Parameter
n6 Values (24-Pin Printers) ..................................................................................... 118
Table 94: IBM/Epson Select UPC A Command — Character Widths for Parameter n5 Values
(24-Pin Printers)..................................................................................................... 119
Table 95: IBM/Epson Select UPC A Command — Start/Stop Codes and Center Bars for
Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers) .................................................................... 120
Table 96: IBM/Epson Select UPC E Command — Maximum Character Widths for Parameter
n5 Values (24-Pin Printers) ..................................................................................... 121
Table 97: IBM/Epson Select EAN 8 Command — Maximum Character Widths for Parameter
n5 Values (24-Pin Printers) ..................................................................................... 122
Table 98: IBM/Epson Select EAN 13 Command — Maximum Character Widths for
Appendix C: Listing of Tables
139
Parameter n5 Values (24-Pin Printers) .................................................................... 123
Table 99: IBM/E/ML ESC { Command — Emulations for n Values.......................................... 125
Table 100: IBM/Epson ESC r Command — Color Selections for n Values .............................. 130
Table 101: Epson ESC ( U Command — Increments of Movement for Pn Values ................... 131
Table 102: Pin Assignments for Parallel Interface Signals....................................................... 133
Table 103: Pin Assignments for Serial Interface Signals.......................................................... 134
140
Appendix C: Listing of Tables
Index
9-pin graphics
commands ..................... 53-60
24-pin graphics
commands ..................... 61-66
Custom character
commands ...................39-51
design ...............39-40, 46-47
Cut sheet feeder commands . 126
A
D
Abbreviations ..........................ix
Abicomp code page
commands ..................... 11-13
Absolute dot position
command ..........................80
Acronyms................................ix
Ascenders........39, 41-42, 44, 45
Auto line feed commands.......89
Danish character set
commands........................9-10
Delete command ................. 127
Descenders ................39, 41-42,
44, 45
Designing custom
characters............39-40, 46-47
Dot position commands ....79-81
Double
density graphics
commands......54-56, 62-63
height commands.........21-24
width commands..........21-24
Down line load
commands... 41, 43, 45, 47, 50
Draft print commands .......29-32
Drivers, printer......................1-4
Dutch character set
commands........................9-10
B
Backspace command .............69
Bar code commands..... 101-124
Block graphics command .........8
BRASCII code page
commands ..................... 11-13
British character set
commands ....................... 9-10
C
Canadian French code
page commands............. 11-13
Cancel command .................125
Carriage return
command ..........................69
/line feed commands .........87
Center justification
command ............................83
Change emulation
command ..........................125
Character
set commands ............... 5-13
size commands............ 12-23
spacing commands ...... 25-26
style commands........... 29-38
Characters per line .................15
Code page commands...... 11-13
Color command ...................130
Combined print
features command .............24
mode command ................31
Command summary .......xi-xxxvi
Compressed pitch............. 16-19
Control code commands ........13
CRT graphics
commands ............... 55-57, 63
E
Embedded commands.............. 4
Emphasized print
commands............... 31, 34, 36
Emulations ............................1-2
Enhanced print
commands............... 31, 34, 36
Epson
command summary
FX ........................xix-xxiv
LQ....................... xxv-xxxi
emulation, drivers ............1-2
F
Fine line feed
commands......................88-89
Font commands ................29-34
Form feed commands............. 87
French Canadian character
set commands ..................9-10
Full justification command..... 83
Index
G
German character set
commands ....................... 9-10
Graphics commands......... 53-67
line feed commands.......... 60
H
Half-speed command .......... 127
Height, double,
commands ..................... 21-24
Horizontal control
commands ................... 69-83
motion index (HMI)...... 27
print position........... 76-81
tab .......................... 73-76
HSD print mode
command....................... 29-32
I
I-Prime command ................ 131
IBM Proprinter command
summary .......................xi-xviii
emulation, drivers ............ 1-2
Incremental printing
command............................ 82
Increment of movement
command................... 130-131
Indent commands ....... 69-72, 76
Initialize printer command... 127
Intercharacter spacing
commands ..................... 25-26
Interfacing
parallel ........................... 133
serial........................ 134-135
International character
set commands .................. 9-10
Italian character set
commands ....................... 9-10
Italics commands............... 7, 35
J
Japanese character set
command............................ 10
Justification commands.......... 83
141
L
P
S
Latin American character
set commands.................. 9-10
Left
justification command .......83
margin commands. 69-72, 76
Line
character set command........8
feed commands ........... 87-89
feed, graphics ....................60
spacing commands ...... 90-93
Lotus 1-2-3...............................4
Page
format command............... 98
length commands.........85-86
Paper-out sensor
commands......................... 128
Parallel interface .................. 133
Pitch commands ...............15-19
Plotter graphics
commands................55-57, 63
Portugal code page
command .......................11-13
Postnet bar code
commands................. 112, 124
Print
quality commands........29-32
suppress mode
commands.................... 129
Printer drivers .......................1-2
Programming graphics ..... 54, 62
Proportional spacing
commands........................... 25
Publisher character set
commands........................9-10
Serial interface.............. 134-135
Single density graphics
commands .......... 54-56, 62-63
Skip down command............. 96
Skip over perforation
commands ................... 99-100
Software I-prime command.. 131
Spanish character set
commands ....................... 9-10
Stop printing command ....... 131
Subscript commands........ 20, 24
Superscript commands..... 20, 24
Swedish character set
commands ....................... 9-10
M
Margin setting
commands ............... 69-72, 76
MICROLINE Standard
command
summary ............ xxxii-xxxvi
emulation drivers............. 1-2
Microsoft
Windows.............................3
Word...................................3
Most significant bit
commands .........................128
Move to left/right
commands ..................... 76-81
MSB commands ...................128
Multilingual code page
command ...................... 11-13
Multiple print positions
command ...................... 77-78
N
NLQ print mode
command ...................... 29-32
Norway code page
command ...................... 10-11
Norwegian character set
commands ..................... 11-13
O
Q
Quadruple density graphics
commands...........54-56, 62-63
R
Raster graphics command ...... 66
Reassign graphics
command ...................... 57, 64
Relative dot position
commands......................79-80
Reverse line feed
commands........................... 89
Right
justification command....... 83
margin commands........69-72
ROM to RAM copy
commands......... 40, 43, 45, 49
Tab commands
horizontal .................... 73-76
vertical......................... 93-96
Top of form commands.......... 98
U
Underline commands ............ 36
Uni-directional print
commands .......................... 82
Upper range control code
commands .......................... 13
USA code page
command....................... 11-13
Utility print mode
commands ..................... 29-32
V
Vertical
control commands ..... 85-100
format unit commands . 95-96
tab commands ............. 93-96
unit setting command ....... 93
W
Width, double,
commands ............... 21, 22-24
Windows................................. 3
Word, Microsoft ...................... 3
WordPerfect ............................ 3
Okidata Microline Std command
summary................. xxxii-xxxvi
Okidata software drivers....... 2-3
Overscore commands ............37
142
T
Index
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : Yes Producer : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows Modify Date : 1999:08:30 14:38:46-04:00 Author : Susan Cramer Create Date : 1999:08:30 13:55:35 Creator : Microsoft Word 8.0 Page Count : 180 Page Mode : UseNoneEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools